CCS 0711 e

ms Safe.t® Technology Safe.t® Seminars Safe.t® Solutions Safe.
t® Components
e.t® Solutions Safe.t® Components Safe.t® Systems Safe.t® Technology Safe.t® Seminars
ms Safe.t® Technology Safe.t® Seminars Safe.t ® Solutions Safe.t® Components
fe.t® Solutions Safe.t ® Components Safe.t® Systems Safe.t®Technology

fe.t® Systems Safe.t ® Technology Safe.t® Seminars Safe.t® Solutions Safe.t® Components
2011
Control and connection equipment
Control and connection equipment

Reservation
Technical data subject to change without notice. No claims for damages arising from alterations, errors or misprints
shall be allowed. Attention is drawn to the applicable standards and regulations on safety components and systems
together with the relevant operating and installation instructions.
BARTEC Catalogue Control and connection equipment Edition 2011 Printed in Germany
Content
ComEx Control stations
Control panels
Pressurised control panels
Installation systems
Switches
Cable entries and line bushings
Signalling devices/Work light

Content
ComEx Control stations 7 - 39

Actuating elements for zone 1 and 21 8 - 13
05-0003-00....
Switch module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 14

07-3321-1.00
Lamp module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 15

07-3351-11.0
Illuminated button with terminals for rail-mounted installation 16

07-3361-1..0
Potentiometer with terminals for rail-mounted installation 17
Control switch installation module, 4-pole 18 - 19

07-333-1...
Switch module for local control stations 20

07-3323-1.00
Lamp module for local control stations 21

07-3353-11.0
Illuminated button for local control stations 22

07-3361-1..0
Potentiometer for local control stations 23

07-3373-1D.0
Switch module with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 24
07-3323-3.03
Lamp module with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 25
07-3353-31.3
Illuminated button with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 26
07-3363-3..3
Potentiometer with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 27

07-3373-3D.3
ComEx Actuating elements, Accessories 28 - 29
ComEx Control stations, Standard 30 - 31

07-351.-
ComEx Control stations for zone 21 and 22 32 - 35

07-351.-....
Control switch complete device, 4-pole 36 - 37

07-3512-10G........
ComEx Control stations, stainless steel 38 - 39

07-3.32.
Control panels 41 - 65
Local control stations for zone 1 and 21 42 - 43
07-31..-
Local control stations for zone 2 and 22 44 - 45

A7-31..-
Limit Monitor 46 - 47
07-31B.-..../900.
Aluminium enclosures 48 - 49
07-423.-1.
Control stations in flameproof enclosures 50 - 51

07-41.01-.61
Flameproof control panels Ex d IIC 52 - 53

07-43.0-0.../....
Flameproof control panels Ex d IIB 54 - 55
Small control, regulating and display devices 56 - 57

07-61.1-...
Potentiometer max. 4 W with individual leads 58 - 59

07-661.-.11.
Potentiometer max. 8 W with cable tail 60 - 61

07-662.-.1..
Customer requirements Control stations 62 - 65
Pressurised control panels 67 - 83

Control unit APEX 2003.00 68
07-3711-1216/...7
Control unit APEX 2003.002x 69

07-3711-1216/...7
Control unit APEX 2003.MV 70

07-3711-2213/.000
Control unit APEX 2003.SI 71

07-3711-3223/.001
SILAS Controller 72 - 73
A7-3741-1110/.000
Ex p combination cabinets 74 - 75
Digital purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 76 - 77

05-0056-00..
Proportional purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 78

05-0056-00..
Digital purging gas valve for Ex pz operating equipment 79

03-05110-00..
Pressure monitor module 80

17-51P3-..0.
Pressure reducer 81
05-0056-00..
Customer requirements Ex p equipment 82 - 83

Installation systems 85 - 131
Plug-and-socket for Zone 1 + 2, 21 + 22 86 - 87
07-810-....
Enclosures and distribution boxes 88 - 105
Polyester enclosures/distribution boxes 89 - 94
07-51..-..../....
Polyester distribution boxes for Zone 1 and 21 95 - 103
07-51..-..../....
07-5103-960.
Polyester cabinets/-distribution boxes with door 104 - 123
07-51..-.00./0...
Terminal box 106
07-5311-....
Aluminium enclosures 107
07-5190-..../....
Aluminium enclosures/distribution boxes 108 - 113
07-51..-..../....
Aluminium distribution boxes for Zone 1 and 21 114 - 117
07-51..-..../....
High quality stainless steel 118 - 120
enclosures/distribution boxes/cabinets for Zone 1 and 21
07-56..-....
Accessories for empty enclosures and distribution boxes 121
Customer requirements Terminal Boxes 122 - 123
Rail-mounted terminals 124
05-...
Protective conductor terminals and PE terminals 125
05-0012-00..
Mini-terminal 126 - 127
07-9702-0.20/.
Terminal block 128 - 129
07-9721-0..0
Cable gland 130
03-606.-0...
Screw plugs 131
03-5210-00..
Switches 133 - 149

Insert switch/limit switch 134 - 137
07-.511-..../..
Miniature insert switch/limit switch 138 - 139
07-.501-..../..
Limit switch plastic encapsulated 140 - 141
07-2961-1.62/..
Limit switch metal encapsulated 142 - 143
07-295.-..30/..
Position switch Aluminium 144 - 145
07-2911-1.../..
Position switch Thermoplastic 146 - 149
07-2931-1.../..
Cable entries and line bushings 151 - 186
Line bushings 152 - 159
07-91..-..../.
Bushing conductor studs, 690, 1000 and 1600 V 160 - 165

TOS8.100A....V-RF
Optical fibre bushings 166 - 167

57-91..-....
Electrode line bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 168

37-9405-123./1000
Bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 169

07-96..-..../.xxx
Cable entries 170 - 173

07-92..-..../.
Accessories for line bussings and cable entries 174 - 175

03-....-0...
Bushings and cable entries 176 - 181

pressure and vacuum sealed, non explosion-proof
37-910.-..../7..., 37-920.-..../7...
Cable entries with threaded sleeve 182

37-9208-..../2000
Stud-type bushing with threaded sleeve 183

37-9119-A019/70E.
Electrode line bushings 184

37-9A05-125./1000
Special versions 185
Customer requirements Cable entries/line bushings 186
Signalling devices/Work light 187 - 192

Flashing lamp 5 Ws/15 Ws 188 - 189
07-4838-3...
Signal horn 190 - 191

07-4602-1.12
Work light 192

07-5051-3111-.000
ComEx Control stations
Actuating elements
Features Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D

 Easy installation Class I, Zone 1, AEx e IIC, Ex e IIC
UL E184198
 Certified for zones 1 and 21 INMETRO 2003 EC02 CP088 U
 High IP degree of protection 0044
Ambient and operating temp. range
Description -55 °C to +70 °C (Zone 1)
-20 °C to +70 °C (Zone 21)
A large number of variants and versions of
actuating elements are available for the ComEx Permitted for
control and indicator units. All actuating elements Zone 1
are made of high-quality thermoplastic and Zone 21 (Min. requis IP 6X,
conform to the IP 65/IP 66/IP 67 type of protection. Temperature range -20 °C)
Actuating elements To complete the actuating elements, there are
useful accessories such as e. g. label holders, Technical data
marking tags, metal shroud or nut wrench. Storage and transport temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C
Actuating elements with NBR sealing for increased
resistance to oil are available too. Type of protection
See table
The actuating elements are mounted quickly and Impact resistance
easily onto the ComEx control and indicating 7 Nm (Lamp actuators 4 Nm)
devices. Use in Zone 1 and 21 is certified.
Material
Enclosure thermoplastic
Sealings EPDM, NBR for increased
Explosion protection
resistance to oil
Ex protection type
Weight
II 2G Ex e II
See table
II 2D Ex td A21 IP 65, IP 66, IP 67
PTB 00 ATEX 3114 U Fastening
Installation in enclosures with wall
Ex e II
thickness of 1 mm up to 6 mm (threading
Ex tD A21 IP 65, IP 66, IP 67
M30 x 1.5). Suitable for through-holes
IECEx PTB 08.0037U
30.3+0.3 mm
Protection class of the actuating elements

Description Order no. Temperature range -55 °C to +70 °C Temperature range -20 °C to +70 °C
Position selector switch 05-0003-007... IP 54 IP 66, IP 67

Double push button actuator 05-0003-0074.. (*BN) IP 54 IP 6X
05-0003-0075.. (*BN) IP 54 IP 6X
Pushbutton 05-0003-000700 (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Mushroom pushbutton 05-0003-001800 (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Emergency Stop 05-0003-000800 (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Locking mushroom pushbutton 05-0003-001203 (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Lock (DOM) 05-0003-0012.. (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Lock (RONIS) 05-0003-006100 (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Position selector switch BS (2 positions) 05-0003-00090. BS IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Position selector switch BS (3 positions) 05-0003-001... BS IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Key switch (2 positions) 05-0003-007.... (*BN) IP 54 IP 65
Key switch (3 positions) 05-0003-0079.. (*BN) IP 54 IP 65
03-0330-0191/A-03/10-BCS-200865/1
05-0003-0080.. (*BN) IP 54 IP 65
Position selector switch (2 positions) 05-0003-0009... (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Position selector switch (3 positions) 05-0003-001.... (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Lamp 05-0003-001.... (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Illuminated button actuator 05-0003-006.... (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Potentiometer actuator 05-0003-007600 (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
Blanking plug 05-0003-001900 (*BN) IP 54 IP 66, IP 67
*BN for increased resistance to oil (with NBR seal)
10
8
Actuating elements
Selection chart
Illustration Dimensions Description Order no.

1
for ComEx enclosure Position selector switch black

with protective collar, lockable*
only for switch module (2-pole)
34 20.5
26 0-I for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007001 2
for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007101
I - II for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007002
M30 x 1.5
∅ 65

I - 0 - II for control unit 05-0003-007203
HAND - 0 - AUTO for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007224
3
for Control unit/ComEx 316L for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007324
34 20,5 MAN - 0 - AUTO for control unit (flat) 05-0003-007225
26 for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007325
Weight 74 g
4
M30 x 1.5
* 3 boreholes in the protective collar to fit padlocks

∅ 65
in the switch position 0 (I), or to customer

specifications.
5
for ComEx enclosure Double pushbutton actuator with EPDM rubber
membrane or with NBR sealing, 5 labels red, green,
yellow, white, black, supplied loose
20 39
20
for ComEx enclosures with EPDM sealing 05-0003-007500
for ComEx enclosures with NBR sealing 05-0003-007500BN 6
M30 x 1.5
for control units with EPDM sealing 05-0003-007400

75
for control units with NBR sealing 05-0003-007400BN
Weight 52 g
1-6 7
for Control unit/ComEx 316L
20 39
20
M30 x 1.5
75
1-6
13 20 Pushbutton with EPDM rubber membrane or with

NBR sealing, 5 labels red, green, yellow, white, black,
03-0330-0191/A-03/10-BCS-200865/2
supplied loose
M30x1.5
∅ 38
with EPDM sealing 05-0003-007000

with NBR sealing 05-0003-007000BN
1-6 6 Weight 24 g
11
9
Actuating elements
Mushroom pushbutton
38 with EPDM rubber membrane
20
or with NBR sealing, black
M30x1.5
∅ 38 with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001800
∅ 40

6 Weight 24 g
1-6
EMERGENCY STOP slam button with EPDM rubber

38 membrane or with NBR sealing, pushbutton marked
20
"NOT-AUS EMERGENCY STOP - Pull to Release"
M30 x 1.5
DIN EN 60204-1: 2007

∅ 40
∅ 38
DIN EN 60947-5-1: 2005 (VDE 0660 Part 200)
1-6 6 with EPDM sealing 05-0003-000800

Weight 46 g
Locking mushroom pushbutton,

26
13 20 push in without key,
unlock with key, DOM lock 4 A 185
20
M30x1.5
∅ 38

6
1-6 Weight 70 g
Lock DOM lock 4 A 185

26
13 20 Lockable in both positions,
Key retractable in both positions
M30x1.5

∅ 38

Lockable in the depressed position,
1-6 5
Key retractable in the depressed position
03-0330-0191/A-03/10-BCS-200865/3
Tip lock lockable in the initial positions,

Key retractable in the initial positions
Weight 69 g
10
Actuating elements
Lock RONIS lock 455 1

31
20
13 Lockable in both positions,
Key retractable in both positions
M30 x 1.5
∅ 38

1-6 5 Weight 75 g 2
2 switching positions Position selector switch BS, black, 3

with 2 or 3 switching positions,
30 20 90° turned 90° for ComEx enclosures
0-I for control units 05-0003-000900BS
for ComEx enclosures 05-0003-000901BS
M30x1.5
∅ 45
I - 0 - II (I + II latching) for control units 05-0003-001000BS 4

1-6
I - 0 - II (I + II momentary contact)
for control units 05-0003-001001BS
3 switching positions for ComEx enclosures 05-0003-001101BS
30 20 ° 60 I - 0 - II (I latching, II momentary) 5
60 °
M30x1.5
∅ 45
I - 0 - II (I momentary, II latching)
1-6 for ComEx enclosures 05-0003-001103BS
Weight 33 g
6
2 switching positions Key-operated switch, RONIS lock 456,

with 2 or 3 switching positions,
36 turned 90° for ComEx enclosures 7
13 20 90°
0-I for control units 05-0003-007700
M30x1.5
latching, for ComEx enclosures 05-0003-007800

0
I
∅ 38
key retractable
1-6 0-I for control units 05-0003-007701

momentary contact, for ComEx enclosures 05-0003-007801
Position I
key not retractable
3 switching positions
36 I - 0 - II for control units 05-0003-007900

60°
13 20 60° (I + II latching), for ComEx enclosures 05-0003-008000
I
key retractable
M30x1.5
II
0
∅ 38
Weight 49 g
03-0330-0191/A-03/10-BCS-200865/4
1-6
11
Actuating elements
2 switching positions Position selector switch, black,

with 2 or 3 switching positions
28 90°
13 20 0-I for control units
M30x1,5
∅ 38
turned 90° for ComEx enclosures

6 with EPDM sealing 05-0003-000901
1-6 with NBR sealing 05-0003-000901BN
I - 0 - II for control units
(I + II latching) with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001000
3 switching positions with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001100
28 I - 0 - II for control units
13 20 ° 60
60 ° (I + II momentary) with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001001
M30x1,5
∅ 38

6 with NBR sealing 05-0003-001101BN
(I latching, with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001002
II momentary with NBR sealing 05-0003-001002BN
contact)
(I momentary with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001003
contact, with NBR sealing 05-0003-001003BN
II latching)
Weight 33 g
Lamp module actuator

22 20
red with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001300
M30x1.5

∅ 38
green with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001400

1-6 with NBR sealing 05-0003-001400BN
yellow with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001500

03-0330-0191/A-03/10-BCS-200865/5
white with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001600

blue with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001700

Weight 19 g
12
Actuating elements
14.5 Illuminated button actuator 1

20
13
red with EPDM sealing 05-0003-006500
M30x1.5
∅ 38
green with EPDM sealing 05-0003-006600
1-6
yellow with EPDM sealing 05-0003-006700
2
white with EPDM sealing 05-0003-006800
blue with EPDM sealing 05-0003-006900
Weight 19 g 3
26 Potentiometer actuator, black, durable and

20
abrasion-resistant, Scale gradation from 0 to 10
4
M30 x 1.5
Weight 28 g
1-6
20 Blanking plug, to cover unused holes in the cover

17
13 with EPDM sealing 05-0003-001900
M30x1.5
6
∅ 38
Weight 20 g
1-6
7
03-0330-0191/A-03/10-BCS-200865/6
13
Switch module with terminals for rail-mounted installation
Switch module with terminals

for rail-mounted installation
Explosion protection Weight Dimensions

approx. 70 g
Ex protection type
II 2G Ex de IIC Gb Mounting 52 33.5
I M2 Ex de I Mb on mounting rail TS 35 x 7.5
Class I, Zone 1, AEx de IIC, Ex de IIC Shock resistance
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
46
57.5
Certification
PTB 99 ATEX 1043 U
UL E184198 0.5
IECEx PTB 07.0046 U
INMETRO 2003EC02CP081U
Ambient temperature
-55 °C to +60 °C
Selection chart
Code Code
Technical data Type of contacts
no.
Actuating element no.
Protection class 2 NC Pushbutton 0700

determined by the actuating element and Double push button actuator 7400
ComEx enclosure, terminals IP 20
1 Emergency stop NOT-AUS 0800
Rated insulation voltage
690 V Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions 0900
Rated voltage Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions 1000

400 V 400 V 110 V 24 V 2 NO
Selector switch I + II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1001
Utilization category
Selector switch I latching, II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1002
AC-12 AC-15 DC-13 DC-13 2
Rated operating currents Selector switch I momentary-contact, II latching, 3 positions 1003
16 A 10 A 0,5 A 1A Mushroom pushbutton, black 1800
Lockable in both positions, DOM lock 1200

Conventional thermal current Ithe 1 NC + 1 NO
16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C Lockable in the depressed position, DOM lock 1201
Contact options 4 Lockable in the initial position, DOM lock 1202

contacts with positive break operation Locking-type mushroom pushbutton 1203
(self-cleaning)
1 NC and 1 NO or Lockable in both positions, RONIS lock 6100
2 NC or 2 NO
Contact material
AgSnO2 Complete order no.
Enclosure material Switch module without actuating element 07-3321-1 00
03-0330-0192/B-05/11-BCS-200866/1
Thermoplastic Actuating element

Standard 05-0003-00
Connection
Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded Increased oil resistance 05-0003-00 BN
Mechanical life Please enter code number.
106 switching cycles
Storage and transport temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C
14
Lamp module with terminals for rail-mounted installation
Lamp module with terminals

for rail-mounted installation 2
Explosion protection Mounting Dimensions

on mounting rail TS 35 x 7.5
Ex protection type (DIN EN 60715)
II 2G Ex de IIC Gb 52 33.5
3
I M2 Ex de I Mb Shock resistance
Class I, Zone 1, AEx de IIC, Ex de IIC DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
∅ 19
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
46
57.5
Certification
PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U 91
UL E184198 4
IECEx PTB 10.0014 U
INMETRO2003EC02CP096U
Ambient temperature
-55 °C to +50 °C
+60 °C (AC/DC 12 V to 24 V) Selection chart
5
Wiring diagram Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
Technical data
red 1 red 3
Protection class
determined by the actuating element and green 2 green 4
ComEx enclosure, terminals IP 20 6
yellow 3 yellow 5
300 V
white 4 white 6
Rated operating voltage
AC 12 V to 250 V (T a < +50 °C) blue 5 blue 7
DC 12 V to 60 V (T a < +50 °C) 7
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (T a < +60 °C)
Power consumption
Complete order no.
<1W Lamp module without actuating element 07-3351-11 0
Lamp Actuating element
LED Standard 05-0003-001 00
red, green, yellow, white, blue
Increased oil resistance 05-0003-001 00BN
Illumination
Please enter code number.
very bright, over a visible angle of 180°
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
Connection
Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
Electrical life
>105 running hours
03-0330-0192/B-05/11-BCS-200866/4

-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight
approx. 90 g
15
Illuminated button with terminals for rail-mounted installation
Illuminated button with terminals

for rail-mounted installation
Explosion protection Connection Dimensions

Ex protection type
Electrical life 52 33.5
II 2G Ex de IIC >105 running hours
I M2 Ex de I
Class I, Zone 1, AEx de IIC, Ex de IIC Mechanical life
∅ 19
>105 switching cycles
46
57.5
Certification Storage and transport temperature
PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U -55 °C to +70 °C
84
UL E184198 Weight
IECEx PTB 10.0014 U approx. 110 g
INMETRO 2003 EC 02 CP096 U Mounting
Ambient temperature on mounting rail TS 35 x 7.5
-55 °C to +50 °C (DIN EN 60715)
+60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V) Shock resistance
DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
Technical data
Protection class
determined by the actuating element and
Selection chart
ComEx enclosure, terminals IP 20 Type of contact Code no. Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
1 NC
300 V
red 1 red 5
AC 12 V to 250 V (T a < +50 °C)
7
DC 12 V to 60 V (T a < +50 °C) green 2 green 6
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (T a < +60 °C)
Power consumption
<1W yellow 3 yellow 7
Lamp 1 NO
LED: red, green, yellow, white, blue
white 4 white 8
Illumination 8
 Contact element blue 5 blue 9
Rated voltage
230 V 24 V
Utilization category Complete order no.
AC-15 DC-13
Illuminated button without actuating element 07-3361-1 0
Rated operating currents
Actuating element
1A 0,25 A
Standard 05-0003-006 00
03-0330-0192/A-07/10-BCS-200866/7
Contacts
1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element Increased oil resistance 05-0003-006 00BN
Switching capacity Please enter code number.
AC-15 1 A/230 V
DC-13 0.25 A/24 V
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
16
Potentiometer with terminals for rail-mounted installation
Potentiometer with terminals

for rail-mounted installation 2
Explosion protection Dimensions
Ex protection type
52 33.5 3
II 2G Ex de IIC
I M2 Ex de I
Ex de IIC
Certification
46
57.5
PTB 05 ATEX 1064 U
IECEx PTB I0.0017 U 4
Ambient temperature
61
-55 °C to +60 °C
Technical data
Protection class
Selection chart 5
determined by the actuating element and
ComEx enclosure, terminals IP 20 Wiring diagram Resistance Code no.
500 V 1 kΩ 4
Max. rated voltage
AC/DC 320 V 2.2 kΩ 5 6
Resistance 4.7 kΩ 6
1 kΩ to 10 kΩ
Curve shape 10 kΩ 7
linear
Other resistances on request.
Resistance tolerance 7
 20 % Complete order no.
Rated output Potentiometer without actuating element 07-3371-1D 0
max. 1 W at Ta < +40 °C Please enter code number.
Resistor material Actuating element
carbon film on ceramics
Standard (Skala 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600
Rotation Increased oil resistance (Skala 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600BN
mech. 285° -5°
electr. about approx. 250°
Torgue (beginning) Notes for installation and inspection:
0.5 to 1.5 Ncm At rated voltage: < AC 50 V/< DC 120 V
Torgue (end stop) (protection low voltage in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 T. 410)
> 100 Ncm potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element.
Enclosure material At rated voltage: > AC 50 V to max. AC/DC 320 V
thermoplastic potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element
Connection or has to be deenergized.
03-0330-0431/A-07/10-BCS-240908
Double terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2, fine stranded

Mechanical life
25000 sinusoidal cycles
-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight
approx. 71 g
17
Control switch installation module, 4-pole
Technical data
Connection
Contact material
AgSnO2
Enclosure material
Features Thermoplastic
 Contacts with positive break operation Installation

on TS 35 x 7.5 mounting rail
 Latched and momentary-contact positions
Switch function
Control switch max. 4 switch contacts
Description different NC/NO contact assemblies
latching and momentary-contact functions
This control switch has been designed to solve with different switch positions
the variety of problems encountered in chemical
and petrochemical plants and on explosion- Contacts
proofed electrical machinery. Four switch contacts contacts with positive break operation
as opening and closing elements in different (self-cleaning)
permutations permit a variety of functions. The Installation
opener has a positive break operation. The switch able to be installed in double and triple
actuator offers latched and momentary-contact ComEx enclosures in control units
positions with different switch positions.
Switch isolator
The control switch can be installed quickly and DIN EN 60947-3 (main motor switch)
directly into double or triple ComEx enclosures,
or in combination with other command devices P/AC-3/AC-23 AC-3 AC-23
in control units 230 V 3ph/3kW 1ph/2.2 kW
400 V 3ph/5.5 kW 1ph/3 kW
le = AC-23/400 V/10 A
Control switch according to DIN
Ex protection type EN 60947-5-1 (auxiliary circuit switch)
II 2G Ex de IIC
AC-15 400 V 10 A
I M2 Ex de I
AC-12 400 V 16 A
Class I, Zone 1, AEx de IIC, Ex de IIC
DC-13 24 V 1A
Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D
Certification
PTB 99 ATEX 1043 U  Electrical data
UL E184198
IECEx PTB 07.0046 U
Ui = 690 V
INMETRO 2003 EC02 CP0814
Ue = 450 V
Permissible ambient temperature
Rated impulse strength
-55 °C to +60 °C
Uimp = 6 kV
Conditional rated short-circuit
current at 400 V
le = 4 kA
Dimensions
Short-circuit current
51
(general-purpose l.v.h.b.c back-up fuse
for the protection of cables and circuits)
14
max. 16 A
73
Nominal thermal current

(+40 °C) Ithe =16 A
03-0330-0261/A-07/10-BCS-202008/1
(+60 °C) Ithe =11 A

73 25.5
60
18
Control switch installation module, 4-pole
Selection chart
Contact arrangement of control switch Code no. Contact arrangement of control switch Code no. 1
A01 C06
A02 C07
3
A03 E08
4
A04 E09
H05 L01 5
Contact arrangement of switch-isolator
6
N01 N02
Further contact versions are available upon request.
Complete order no. 07-3331-1 7

Please enter code number. Technical data subject to change without notice.
Selection chart
Illustration/Dimensions Description Order no.
For ComEx enclosure 34 Black position selector with protective collar, lockable*
26 only for 4-pole switch
13
0-I for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-006201
für Control unit (flat) 05-0003-006301
M30 x 1.5
∅ 65
I - II for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-006202

I - 0 - II for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-006203
für Control unit 05-0003-006303
For control unit/ComEx 316L
34
0 - I - II for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-006204
03-0330-0261/A-07/10-BCS-202008/2
26 für Control unit (flat) 05-0003-006304

13
0 - I - II - III for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-006205
M30 x 1.5
0 - I - II - III - IV for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-006206

∅ 65

HAND - 0 - AUTO for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-006209
*In principle, there are 3 boreholes in the protective collar to fit padlocks. If no further details are given on which switching position is to be locked, the boreholes are
provided in the switch position 0 (I), other to customer specifications.
19
Switch module for local control stations
Switch module with terminals

for panel-mounted installation
approx. 87 g
Ex protection type
II 2G Ex de IIC Gb Mounting 37
I M2 Ex de I Mb locked, by bayonet lock
Class I, Zone 1, AEx de IIC, Ex de IIC Shock resistance
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
57
46
Certification
PTB 99 ATEX 1043 U
UL E184198 33,5 65
IECEx PTB 07.0046 U
INMETRO 2003EC02CP081U
Ambient temperature
-55 °C to +60 °C
Selection chart
Code Code
Technical data Type of contact
no.
Actuating element no.
Protection class 2 NC Pushbutton 0700
Determined by actuating element and
Double push button actuator 7400
control station enclosure,
terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529). Emergency stop NOT-AUS 0800
1 0900
Rated insulation voltage Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions
690 V Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions 1000
Selector switch I + II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1001
Rated voltage 1002
Selector switch I latching, II momentary-contact, 3 positions
400 V 400 V 110 V 24 V 2 NO Selector switch I momentary-contact, II latching, 3 positions 1003
Selector switch with protective collar 0 + I 7001
AC-12 AC-15 DC-13 DC-13
Selector switch with protective collar I + 0 7002
Rated operating currents 2
Selector switch with protective collar I + 0 + II 7203
16 A 10 A 0,5 A 1A
Mushroom pushbutton, black 1800
Conventional thermal current Ithe Lockable in both positions, DOM lock 1200
16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C
Lockable in the depressed position, DOM lock 1201
1 NC + NO
Contact options Lockable in the initial position, DOM lock 1202
contacts with positive break operation
Locking-type mushroom pushbutton 1203
(self cleaning)
1 NC and 1 NO or 4 Lockable in both positions, RONIS lock 6100
2 NC or 2 NO Key switch, 2 switching positions latching, key retractable 0 + I 7700
Contact material Key switch, 2 switching positions momentary contact, not retractable 0 + I 7701
AgSnO2 Key switch, 2 switching positions momentary contact, not retractable 0 + I 7900
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic Complete order no.
03-0330-0192/B-05/11-BCS-200866/2
Connection Switch module without actuating element 07-3323-1 00

Actuating element
Mechanical life Standard 05-0003-00
106 switching cycles
Increased oil resistance 05-0003-00 BN
Storage temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C Please enter code number.
20
Lamp module for local control stations
Lamp module with terminals

2
Ex protection type
65
II 2G Ex de IIC Gb 37
I M2 Ex de I Mb
Class I, Zone 1, AEx de IIC, Ex de IIC 3
57
∅ 19
46
Certification
PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U 33.5 97
UL E184198
IECEx PTB 10.0014 U
INMETRO 2003EC02CP096U 4
Ambient temperature
-55 °C to +50 °C
+60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V) Selection chart
Wiring diagram Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no. 5
Technical data
Protection class red 1 red 3
Determined by actuating element and X1
control station enclosure, green 2 green 4
terminals IP 20 (IEC 60529).
yellow 3 yellow 5 6
300 V
X2 white 4 white 6
AC 12 V to 250 V (T a < +50 °C) blue 5 blue 7
DC 12 V to 60 V (T a < +50 °C)
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (T a < +60 °C)
7
Power consumption Complete order no.
<1W Lamp module without actuating element 07-3353-11 0
Lamp Actuating element
LED Standard 05-0003-001 00
Illumination
very bright, over a visible angle of 180° Please enter code number.
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
Connection
Electrical life
> 105 running hours
03-0330-0192/B-05/11-BCS-200866/5
-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight
approx. 90 g
Mounting
locked, by bayonet lock
Shock resistance
DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
21
Illuminated button for local control stations
Illuminated button with terminals

Explosion protection Enclosure material Dimensions

Thermoplastic
Ex protection type
Connection 37 65
II 2G Ex de IIC
I M2 Ex de I Terminals 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
Class I, Zone 1, AEx de IIC, Ex de IIC Electrical life
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D >105 running hours
57
46
Certification Mechanical life
PTB 97 ATEX 1064 U >105 switching cycles 33.5 90
UL E184198
IECEx PTB 10.0014 U Storage and transport temperature
INMETRO 2003 EC02 CP096 U -55 °C to +70 °C
Ambient temperature Weight

-55 °C to +50 °C approx. 130 g
+60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V) Mounting
Technical data
Shock resistance
Protection class DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
determined by actuating element and
control station enclosure,
Rated insulation voltage Selection chart
300 V
Type of contact Code no. Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
AC 12 V to 250 V (T a < +50 °C) 1 NC
red 1 red 5
DC 12 V to 60 V (T a < +50 °C)
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (T a < +60 °C)
7
Power consumption green 2 green 6
<1W
Lamp
yellow 3 yellow 7
1 NO
Illumination
very bright, over a visible angle of 180° white 4 white 8
8
 Contact element
Rated voltage blue 5 blue 9
230 V 24 V
AC-15 DC-13
Rated operating current
Complete order no.
1A 0.25 A Illuminated button without actuating element 07-3363-1 0
03-0330-0295/A-07/10-BCS-217100
Actuating element
Contacts Standard 05-0003-006 00
1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element
Switching capacity
AC-15 1 A/230 V
DC-13 0.25 A/24 V
22
Potentiometer for local control stations
Potentiometer with terminals

for panel-mounted installation 2

Ex protection type 37
II 2G Ex de IIC
I M2 Ex de I 3
Ex de IIC
57
Certification
46
PTB 05 ATEX 1064 U
IECEx PTB I0.0017 U
33.5 65
Ambient temperature 4
-55 °C to +60 °C
Technical data
Protection class Selection chart
control station enclosure, Wiring diagram Resistance Code no. 5
Rated insulation voltage 1 kΩ 4
500 V
2.2 kΩ 5
Max. rated voltage
AC/DC 320 V 4.7 kΩ 6 6
Resistance
1 kΩ to 10 kΩ 10 kΩ 7
Curve shape Other resistances on request.
linear
Resistance tolerance
Complete order no.
7
 20 % Potentiometer without actuating element 07-3373-1D 0
Power consumption Please enter code number.
max. 1 W at Ta < +40 °C Actuating element
Resistor material Standard (scale 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600
carbon film on ceramics Increased oil resistance (scale 1-10) Order no. 05-0003-007600BN
Rotation
mech. 285° -5°
Notes for installation and inspection:
electr. about approx. 250°
Torgue (beginning) At rated voltage: < AC 50 V/< DC 120 V
0.5 to 1.5 Ncm (protection low voltage in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 T. 410)
potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element.
Torgue (end stop)
> 100 Ncm At rated voltage: > AC 50 V to max. AC/DC 320 V
potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element
Enclosure material or has to be deenergized.
Thermoplastic
Connection
03-0330-0427/A-07/10-BCS-240845
Double terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2, fine stranded

Mechanical life
25000 sinusoidal cycles
-55 °C to +70 °C
Weight
approx. 88 g
23
Switch module
with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation)
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC modules with connection cable can be directly installed in
industrial control cabinets in hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection can be maintained due to
easy installation of the actuating elements in the control cabinet. The respective modules can be single-
handedly installed to the actuating elements.
Connection Dimensions
flexible cord 4 x 1.5 mm² (∅ 9.1 mm)
resp. 2 x 1.5 mm², (∅ 7.7 mm)
Features 37
88
Mechanical life 35.5
 Self-cleaning contacts 106 switching cycles
 Positive break contacts Storage temperature
 One-hand fastening -55 °C to +70 °C
46
Weight
Explosion protection approx. 160 g without cable
Ex protection type Cable length 104.5
II 2G Ex d IIC T6 3 m, indicate greater lengths in
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D plain text
Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIC Shock resistance
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
for Canada
Class I, Zone 1, Ex d IIC for Canada Selection chart
Certification Code
Code
PTB 00 ATEX 1092 X Type of contact Actuating element no.
no.
UL E184198
2 NC Pushbutton 0700
INMETRO 2004EC02CP005X
Ambient temperature Double push button actuator 7400
-40 °C to +60 °C (-55 °C on request) 1
Emergency stop NOT-AUS 0800
Technical data Selector switch 0 + I latching, 2 positions 0900

Protection class 2 NO Selector switch I + II latching, 3 positions 1000
Determined by actuating element and
enclosure, up to IP 67, in conjunction Selector switch I + II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1001
2
with actuating element. PTB 00 ATEX 3114 U.
Selector switch I latching, II momentary-contact, 3 positions 1002
Ui = 690 V (on request) Selector switch I momentary-contact, II latching, 3 positions 1003
Ui = 400 V (Standard version) 1 NC Selector switch with protective collar 0 + I 7001
+ 1 NO
Selector switch with protective collar I + 0 7002
Rated voltage 4
Selector switch with protective collar I + 0 + II 7203
400 V 400 V 110 V 24 V
Utilization category Mushroom pushbutton, black 1800
AC-12 AC-15 DC-13 DC-13 1 NC Lockable in both positions, DOM lock 1200
Rated operating currents
Lockable in the depressed position, DOM lock 1201
16 A 10 A 0,5 A 1A 7
Lockable in the initial position, DOM lock 1202
Conventional thermal current Ithe
16 A/+40 °C, 11 A/+60 °C Locking-type mushroom pushbutton 1203
Contact options 1 NO Lockable in both positions, RONIS lock 6100

contacts with positive break operation
(self cleaning) Key switch, 2 switching positions latching, key retractable 0 + I 7700
8
1 NC and 1 NO or Key switch, 2 switching positions momentary contact, not retractable 0 + I 7701
2 NC or 2 NO or
03-0330-0192/B-05/11-BCS-200866/3
1 NC or 1 NO Key switch, 3 switching positions latching, key retractable I + 0 + II 7900

Contact material
AgSnO2 Complete order no.
Enclosure material Switch module without actuating element 07-3323-3 03*)
Thermoplastic
Actuating element Standard 05-0003-00
Increased oil resistance 05-0003-00 BN
*)
Please enter code number. Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
24
Lamp module
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC modules with connection cable can be directly installed in
industrial control cabinets in hazardous areas. A high IP degree of protection can be maintained due to 1
easy installation of the actuating elements in the control cabinet. The respective modules can be single-
handedly installed to the actuating elements.
Weight Dimensions
approx. 180 g without cable
Features Mounting 37 120 2

locked, by bayonet lock 35.5 88
 Long service life
Cable length
 Illumination 180°
3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text
ø 19
46
 Brilliant colours
Shock resistance
 One-hand fastening
DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms 3
Note 136.5
The connection cable for lamp modules must
Ex protection type be installed in a way which ensures that no
II 2G Ex d IIC T6 capacitive influence (voltage transmission) is
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D possible through lines routed in parallel.
Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIC 4
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
for Canada
Class I, Zone 1, Ex de IIC for Canada Selection chart
Certification Wiring diagram Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X
UL E184198 red red
5
1 3
INMETRO 2004EC02CP006X
Ambient temperature green 2 green 4
-40 °C to +50 °C (-55 °C on request)
+60 °C (AC/DC 12 to 24 V) yellow 3 yellow 5
Technical data white 4 white 6 6
Protection class
blue 5 blue 7
enclosure, up to IP 67, in conjunction with
actuating element. PTB 00 ATEX 3114 U.
Complete order no.
Rated insulation voltage 7
300 V Lamp module without actuating element 07-3353-31 3*)
AC 12 V to 250 V (T a < +50 °C) Actuating element Standard 05-0003-001 00
DC 12 V to 60 V (T a < +50 °C)
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (T a < +60 °C)
Power consumption
<1W Please enter code number.
Lamp
LED *)
Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
Illumination
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
03-0330-0192/B-05/11-BCS-200866/6
Connection
flexible cord 2 x 0.75 mm² (∅ 6.4 mm)
Electrical life
>105 running hours
Storage temperature
-55 °C to +70 °C
25
Illuminated button
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC
modules with connection cable can be directly
installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous
Features areas. A high IP degree of protection can be
maintained due to easy installation of the actuating
 High service life
elements in the control cabinet. The respective
 Brilliant colours modules can be single-handedly installed to the
 One-hand fastening actuating elements.
Electrical life Dimensions

Explosion protection >105 running hours
Ex protection type Mechanical life
II 2G Ex d IIC T6 >105 switching cycles
37 114
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D 35.5 88
Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIC, Ex d IIC Storage temperature

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D -55 °C to +70 °C
46
for Canada Weight
Class I, Zone 1, Ex de IIC for Canada approx. 200 g without cable
Certification Cable length
PTB 97 ATEX 1065 X 131
3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text
UL E184198
Mounting
INMETRO 2004 EC02 P006 X
Ambient temperature
Shock resistance
-40 °C to +50 °C
-55 °C on request DIN EN 60068-2-27: 1995, 30 g 18 ms
Technical data Selection chart

Protection class
determined by actuating element and Type of contact Code no. Colour LED Code no. Colour actuator Code no.
enclosure. Switch module up to
1 NC
IP 67 in conjunction with actuating element.
red 1 red 5
PTB 00 ATEX 3114 U.
Rated insulation voltage 7
300 V green 2 green 6
AC 12 V to 250 V (T a < +50 °C)
DC 12 V to 60 V (T a < +50 °C) yellow 3 yellow 7
AC/DC 12 V to 24 V (T a < +60 °C) 1 NO
Power consumption
<1W white 4 white 8
8
Lamp
blue 5 blue 9
Illumination
 Contact element
Complete order no.
Rated voltage
Illuminated button without actuating element 07-3363-3 3*)
230 V 24 V
Actuating element Standard 05-0003-006 00
AC-15 DC-13
Rated operation currents Increased oil resistance 05-0003-006 00BN
03-0330-0296/A-07/10-BCS-217101
1A 0.25 A Please enter code number.

*)
Contacts Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
1 NC or 1 NO as snap switch element
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
Connection Note
flexible cable 4 x 0.75 mm2 (∅ 7.2 mm) The connection cable for illuminated buttons must be installed in a way which ensures that no
capacitive influence (voltage transmission) is possible through lines routed in parallel.
26
Potentiometer
Description
As completely certified equipment, BARTEC
modules with connection cable can be directly 1
installed in industrial control cabinets in hazardous
Features areas. A high IP degree of protection can be
maintained due to easy installation of the actuating
 High end stop torque
elements in the control cabinet. The respective
 High IP degree of protection modules can be single-handedly installed to the
 One-hand fastening actuating elements. 2

approx. 240 g with 1 m cable
Ex protection type 37 88
II 2G Ex d IIC T6 Cable length 35.5
3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text 3
Certification
PTB 05 ATEX 1065 X
46
Ambient temperature
-40 °C to +60 °C
(-55 °C on request) 104.5
4
Technical data
Protection class
enclosure. Potentiometer up to IP 67 Selection chart
in conjunction with actuating element. 5
PTB 00 ATEX 3114 U. Wiring diagram Resistance value Code no.
Ui = 500 V 1 kΩ 4
Ui = 400 V (Standard version)
2.2 kΩ 5
Max. rated operating voltage 6
AC/DC 320 V 4.7 kΩ 6
Resistance
1 kΩ to 10 kΩ 10 kΩ 7
Characteristic curve Other resistances on request.
linear
Complete order no. 7
 20 % Potentiometer without actuating element 07-3373-3D 3*)
Power consumption Please enter code number.
max. 1 W for Ta < +40 °C *)
Standard length 3 m, indicate greater lengths in plain text.
Resistance material
carbon layer on ceramics
Actuating element
Rotation range Standard (Scale 1-10) 05-0003-007600
mech. 285° -5°
Increased oil resistance (Scale 1-10) 05-0003-007600BN
electr. effective approx. 250°
Torque (beginning)
0.5 to 1.5 Ncm
Torque (end stop)
> 100 Ncm
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
03-0330-0426/A-07/10-BCS-240844
Connection Notes for installation and inspection:

flexible cable 3 x 0.75 mm² At rated voltage: < AC 50 V/< DC 120 V
Mechanical life (protection low voltage in accordance with DIN VDE 0100 T. 410)
25000 sinusoidal cycles potentiometer drive shaft can be operated without actuating element.
Storage temperature At rated voltage: > AC 50 V to max. AC/DC 320 V
-55 °C to +70 °C potentiometer drive shaft can only be operated with actuating element
or has to be deenergized.
27
Actuating elements Accessories
Selection chart
Illustration Description Order no.
Fixing nut 05-1138-0009

M 30 to fix the actuating elements
in the mounting wall of enclosure
resp. in the enclosure
Printed pushbutton labels 05-0091-0019

6 loose pushbutton labels
1 x green marked START, ON, I
1 x red marked STOP, OFF, O
Spanner 05-1191-0001
Label holder
Label holder for actuating elements 05-0044-0001
with label insert 03-5412-0056
Contrast plate 03-5412-0057

for Emergency/Off impact switch
yellow ∅ 90 mm
Label 03-3600-0021
unmarked, for device information
Marking tag 05-1105-0020

for an additional label,
for all actuating elements
03-0330-0191/A-10/10-BCS-200865/7
Examples Label (without marking) 03-5412-0060

I II HAND AUTO for marking tag
0 II AUTO MANU Labelling to your specifications
UP 0 DOWN DROP 0 LIFT
(see examples)
HAND AUTO UP 0 DOWN
28
Actuating elements Accessories
Selection chart
Illustration Description Order no. 1
ComEx flange set 05-0091-0046

for the connection of two ComEx enclosures
includes 1 threaded sleeve, 1 lock nut 2
and 1 O-ring
Locking device 05-0037-0007 3

(without padlock) for ComEx enclosure
NIRO frame, transparent hood of high-quality
thermoplast
Locking device 05-0037-0006

(without padlock) for control boxes
NIRO frame, transparent hood of high-quality
thermoplast
5
Protective metal shroud 05-0032-0009

for emergency stop actuating element
to prevent accidental switching 6
7
External earth stud 05-0012-0124
for outside-connection
Conduit adapter
tested adapter for ComEx enclosure
with NPT internal thread
Thread 1/2'' NPT 05-0004-0009
Thread 3/4'' NPT 05-0004-0010
03-0330-0191/A-10/10-BCS-200865/8
Earth plate ComEx

for earthing of metal cable glands
Thread 1 x M20 05-0012-0114
Thread 2 x M20 05-0012-0115
Thread 1 x M25 05-0012-0116
29
Control stations ComEx Standard
Selection chart
Wiring diagram Description Weight Order no.
1 pushbutton 0.33 kg 07-3511-10P74

1 NO + 1 NC
incl. labels red, green, yellow, white
1 NOT/AUS Emergency Stop 0.36 kg 07-3511-10N84

1 NO + 1 NC
marked NOT/AUS and Emergency-Stop
1 Mushroom Keyswitch 0.40 kg 07-3511-10K34

1 NO + 1 NC
with key to reset
1 Selector switch 0.35 kg 07-3511-10S94

1 NO + 1 NC, 2 position with 2 stops
0 and I, latching

I - 0 - II, latching

I - 0 - II, momentary-contact
1 Lamp 0.35 kg
red 07-3511-10LRR
green 07-3511-10LGG
yellow 07-3511-10LYY
white 07-3511-10LWW
1 Mushroom Pushbutton, black 0.35 kg 07-3511-10P84

1 NO + 1 NC
1 Keyswitch 0.40 kg 07-3511-10K04

1 NO + 1 NC
lockable in both positions
1 Keyswitch 0.40 kg 07-3511-10K14

1 NO + 1 NC
03-0330-0189-08/08-BCS-200863/3
lockable in the pushed-in-position
1 Keyswitch 0.40 kg 07-3511-10K24

1 NO + 1 NC
lockable in the initial position
30
Control stations ComEx Standard
Selection chart
1
Wiring diagram Description Weight Order no.
2 pushbuttons 0.50 kg 07-3512-10P74P74

1 NO + 1 NC each
including key labels 2
3
1 indicator lamp, 1 pushbutton 0.52 kg
with indicated lamp red 07-3512-10LRRP74
green 07-3512-10LGGP74
yellow 07-3512-10LYYP74
white 07-3512-10LWWP74
blue 07-3512-10LBBP74 4
1 NO + 1 NC
1 indicator lamp, 2 pushbuttons 0.70 kg

with indicated lamp red 07-3513-10LRRP74P74 5
green 07-3513-10LGGP74P74
yellow 07-3513-10LYYP74P74
white 07-3513-10LWWP74P74
1 NO + 1 NC each
3 pushbuttons 0.68 kg 07-3513-10P74P74P74 7

1 NO + 1 NC each
including key labels
2 pushbuttons 0.70 kg 07-3513-10P74P74N84

1 emergency stop button
1 NO + 1 NC each
03-0330-0189-08/08-BCS-200863/4
31
ComEx Control stations also for Zone 21 and 22
ComEx control stations
Features Explosion protection Technical data

 3 standard enclosures Ex protection type Connection
 Easy to install II 2G Ex ed IIC T6 Terminals 2.5 mm2
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 67 T 80 °C
 Extremely flexible PE conductor terminals
Class I, Zone 1 AEx ed IIC, Ex ed IIC 4 x 2.5 mm2
 Customer-tailored solutions Class I, Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D
Ex ed IIC, T6
max. AC 690 V
Certification
Description Nominal current
PTB 00 ATEX 1068
max. 16 A
ComEx is a flexible system offering standard as UL E184198
well as customer-specific local control and IECEx PTB 08.0022 Cable entry
indicating units. INMETRO 2004 EC 02 CP003 M20 x 1.5 for cable ∅ 6 to 13 mm
M25 x 1.5 for cable ∅ 7 to 12 mm
You have the choice between three standard Permissible ambient temperature
M25 x 1.5 for cable ∅ 13 to 21 mm
enclosures which can accomodate up to three dif- -55 °C to +60 °C
ferent control and indicating devices. (-20 °C to +60 °C for Zone 21 and 22) Enclosure
Combinations of up to three ComEx enclosures Thermoplastic
are possible. Protection class
Either stuffing box glands in M20 x 1.5 and IP 66/IP 67
M25 x 1.5 made of plastic or cable glands made
of metal are available for the electrical connection.
The plastic glands require no lock nuts.
Metal glands are screwed into a metal earth plate
sheet inside of the enclosure. Maximum amount
of cable clands: two off M20.
To ensure easier operation on site, each enclosure
can be equipped with an individual info-label.
For offshore applications special oil-resistant
03-0330-0189/A-07/10-BCS-200863/1
attachments are available.
32
Dimensions fully pre-assembled units also for Zone 21 and Zone 22
Control unit, single Type 07-3511-.... Control station, double Type 07-3512-....
1
81
88.5 8
81
88.5 8
∅ 5.5
∅ 5.5
50
88
130
93
∅ 5.5
3
∅ 5.5
73
3
3
73
Control station, triple Type 07-3513-.... 4
81
88.5 8
∅ 5.5
5
176
136
6
∅ 5.5
3
73
7
91
88.5 8
∅ 5.5
136
176
∅ 5.5
3
73
03-0330-0189/A-07/10-BCS-200863/2
33
Control stations
Selection chart Actuator elements

Code Code
Illustration Description Illustration Description
no. no.
Pushbutton P7 Lock (DOM)

with rubber membrane and with five loose lockable in both positions, K0
labels: red, green, yellow, white, black key retactable in both positions
lock 4 A 185
lockable in its depressed position, K1
key retactable in its depressed position
lock 4 A 185
Double pushbutton actuator P2
with rubber membrane, 5 loose lockable in its initial position, K2
labels in red, green, yellow, white, black key retactable in its initial position
lock 4 A 185 (tip lock)
Lock (RONIS) K4
lockable in both positions
key retactable in both positions
Emergency Stop N8 lock 445
marked ‘NOT-AUS EMERGENCY STOP’
Lock (RONIS)
Lock 455
2 switching positions E0
0-I latching, key retractable
2 switching positions E1
Locking mushroom push button K3 0-I momentary contact,
pushed in without a key position I key not retractable
unlocked with a key
DOM lock 4 A 185 3 switching positions E2
I-0-II latching on both sides, key retractable
Mushroom pushbutton, black P8

Lamp
red LR
green LG
yellow LY
white LW
blue LB
Illuminated button actuator

red TR
Position selector switch S9 green TG
2 positions, 0 + I latching yellow TY
white TW
blue TB
Blanking plug B1
Position selector switch black, to cover unused holes in the front panel
3 positions I-0-II
I + II latching S0
03-0330-0190-08/11-BCS-200864/2
I + II momentary-contact S1
I latching, II momentary-contact S2
Potentiometer actuating element D0
I momentary-contact, II latching S3 black, scale 1 - 10
34
Control stations
Selection chart Modules

Complete order no.
Kenn- Code 1
Illustration Description
ziffer no.
Switch module
1 NC/1 NO 4
2 NC 1 Actuator element resp. Lamp module operator
2 NO 2
2
Switch module resp. Indicator light or Terminal block
Indicator light
red R 3
green G Measuring instrument
yellow Y
white W
blue B
Please insert code number.
4
Illuminated button Control unit, single 07-3511-10
red 1 NO RB
green 1 NO GB
yellow 1 NO YB
white 1 NO WB Control unit, double 07-3512-10 5
blue 1 NO BB
red 1 NC RA
green 1 NC GA Control unit, double 07-3512-10
yellow 1 NC YA
6
white 1 NC WA
blue 1 NC BA
Control unit, triple 07-3513-10
Potentiometer modul
7
Resistance values Control unit, triple 07-3513-10
1 kΩ 4
2.2 kΩ 5
4.7 kΩ 6
10 kΩ 7
Terminal block
with 6 modular terminals 2.5 mm² 6 Technical data subject to change without notice.
Ex e II
Measuring instrument
03-0330-0190-08/11-BCS-200864/4
1A 03-9020-0024 MM1
5A 03-9020-0025 MM5
Technical data subject to change without notice.

35
Control switch complete device, 4-pole
Features Cable entry

 For Zone 1 and 2, 21 and 22 Standard version:
M20 x 1.5 for cables with ∅ 6 to 12 mm
 Positive break operation
Special version:
 Latched and momentary-contact positions M20 x 1.5 for cables with ∅ 5 to 9 mm
 Easy installation M25 x 1.5 for cables with ∅ 13 to 18 mm
M25 x 1.5 for cables with ∅ 9 to 16 mm
 Customer-specific solutions
Enclosure material
Thermoplastic
Description Protection class
IP 66
This control switch has been designed to solve
the variety of problems encountered in chemical Contact material
and petrochemical plants and on explosion- AgSnO2
proofed electrical machinery in zones 1 and 2 and Switching function
Control switch in Zone 21 and 22. Four switch contacts as 4 switch contacts
opening and closing elements in different NC/NO in different switch permutations
permutations permit a variety of functions. The Latching and momentary-contact functions
operner has a positive break operation. The switch with different switch positions
actuator offers latched and momentary-contact
positions with different switch positions. Contacts
The control switch is supplied in double or triple contacts with positive break operation
ComEx enclosures, or in combination with other (self-cleaning)
command devices, in control units. Switch isolator (main motor switch)
The actuating element can be locked with up to DIN EN 60947-3: 2006
max. 3 padlocks. DIN EN 60947-3: 2008
P/AC-3/AC-23 A AC-3 AC-23
230 V 3 ph/3 kW 1 ph/2.2 kW
Explosion protection 400 V 3 ph/5.5 kW 1 ph/3 kW
Ex protection type le = AC-23/400 V/10 A
II 2G Ex ed IIC T6
Control switch according to DIN
EN 60947-5-1 (auxiliary circuit switch)
Class I, Zone 1 AEx e IIC, Ex ed II C
AC-15 400 V 10 A
AC-12 400 V 16 A
Certification DC-13 24 V 1A
PTB 00 ATEX 1068
UL E184198
 Electrical data
IECEx PTB 08.0022
INMETRO 2004 EC02 CP003 Rated insulation voltage
Ui = 690 V
Permissible ambient temperatures
Ue = 400 V
-55 °C to +60 °C
-20 °C to +60 °C for Zone 21 and 22 Rated impulse strength
Uimp = 6 kV
Conditional rated short/circuit current
Technical data at 400 V
ie = 4 kA
Connection
Terminals 2.5 mm2 Short circuit current
(general-purpose l.v.h.b.c. back-up fuse for
Conductor terminals the protection of cables and circuits)
4 x 2.5 mm2 max. 16 A
Rated insulation voltage Nominal thermal current
max. AC 690 V (+40 °C) Ithe = 16 A
03-0330-0323/A-07/10-BCS-217130/1
(+60 °C) Ithe = 11 A

Rated current
max. 16 A Dimensions
See dimensions for complete device
36
Control switch complete device, 4-pole
Selection chart
Labelling
Code
Labelling
Code Switching arrangement Code Switching arrangement Code 1
no. no. of control switch no. of control switch no.
0-I 01 LOWER - RAISE 14
A01 C06
I - II 02 REMOTE - LOCAL 15
I - 0 - II 03 OFF - OPERATION - ON 16 2
0 - I - II 04
OFF - 0 - ON 17 A02 C07
0 - I - II - III 05
UP - 0 - DOWN 18
0 - I - II - III - IV 06
OUT - OFF - MANUAL 19 3
AUS - EIN 07 A03 E08
LOCAL - REMOTE - AUTO 20
OFF - ON 08
STOP - 0 - START 21
MANUAL - 0 - AUTO 09
AUS - AUTO - EIN 22 A04 E09
MANUAL - 0 - AUTO - ON 10 4
OFF - AUTO - ON 23
MANUAL - OPERATION - I 11
0 - IN -START 24
STOP - START 12
H05 L01
MANUAL - AUTO 13 UNLOCKED - LOCKED 25
5
Other variants available. Switching arrangement for
switch isolator
N01
N02
Please enter code numbers.
Complete order no. Control unit, double 07-3512-10G
Control unit, triple 07-3513-10G
Labelling position selector
Switching arrangement
03-0330-0323/A-07/10-BCS-217130/2
Switch module or indicator light
Other labbelings and switching arrangements on request. Technical data subject to change without notice.
*In principle, there are 3 bore holes at the protective shroud for padlocks.
Where no further information is given on the end position,
bore holes are drilled in the position 0 (I) or as requested.
37
ComEx Control stations Stainless steel
ComEx control stations Stainless steel
Features Explosion protection

 Standard enclosures Ex protection type
 Corrosion resistance II 2G Ex edm IIC T6
 Customer-tailored solutions
Certification
PTB 02 ATEX 1159 for II 2G
IBExU00ATEX1079 for II 2D
Description
Permissible ambient temperature
It‘s a question of control, signalling and display -55 °C to +60 °C
units fitted into stainless steel standard (-20 °C to +60 °C for II 2D)
enclosures. The enclosures are certified for use
in Zone 1 and 2 as well as Zone 21 and 22.
The equipment is highly corrosion resistant due Technical data
to high quality stainless steels. Either plastic or
metal glands are used for electrical connection. Connection
Terminals 2.5 mm2
On request, BARTEC will equip the enclosures
with corresponding control, signalling and display Bore hole for bushings
units and cable glands and supply the required standard version:
labels. 1 x M20 x 1.5
special versions:
2 x M20 x 1.5 up to max. 1 x M40 x 1.5
Enclosure
High-quality stainless steel 316L, 312L
03-0330-0429/A-10/10-BCS-240847/1
Protection class
IP 65

38
Dimensions fully pre-assembled units Stainless steel
Control unit, single Type 07-3232-1275/.... Control station, double Type 07-3132-1475/....
140
120
Control station, triple Type 07-3132-1875/.... Mounting dimensions 4
120
20
∅ 6,2 75 8,5
25
20
180
M5 - 10 deep
03-0330-0429/A-10/10-BCS-240847/2
39
Control panels
Local control stations for Zone 1 and Zone 21
Features
 The right size/material enclosure
 Optimum functionality thanks to the great
variety of components
 Customised planning and implementation
 Certified to many standards
Description
For explosion-proof local controllers BARTEC supplies control units but also offers the complete
offers an extensive range of polyester enclosures wiring to terminal blocks.
with screw fixing lid and hinged doors.
The supply range includes enclosures made of
BARTEC local control stations are certified for aluminium, polyester and stainless steel. These
use in hazardous areas with combustible gas or are fitted with certified modules and glands at
dust. points of penetration in the wall of the enclosure.
The enclosures must be produced in compliance Fields of application
with the requirements for the “Increased Safety“
Chemical and petrochemical industry, process
type of protection or “Protection by Enclosure“.
and plant engineering, pharmaceutical and food
Depending on the specification and number of industry, OFF SHORE areas.
equipment, various enclosure types and sizes are
Thanks to their great variety, the enclosure are
available. The control stations will be equipped
particularly suited for local control stations and
according to your individual requirements with
bus interface units.
control units, alarm units, display units and bus
interface modules.
Industrial serial products can also be fitted in the
controllers for Zone 21 with the tD “Protection by
Enclosure“ type of protection.
The components are mounted either on DIN rails
or installed on the front lid. Depending on the
03-0330-0214/B-05/11-BCS-201185/1
design and requirements, BARTEC not only
42
Explosion protection Technical data Seals

EPDM (Standard)
Ex protection type Material -20 °C to +85 °C 1
(depending on the components installed) Type 07-3101 with lid
aluminium PU (Standard at 07-3109)
for Zone 1 -20 °C to +80 °C
ALSi 12, pressure or chill casting
II 2(1)G Ex demq ia/ib [ia] IIA, IIB, IIC RAL 7001 silver grey Silicone
T6, T5, T4 -55 °C to +100 °C
Type 07-3103 with lid
II 2 G Ex demq ia/ib [ib] IIA, IIB, IIC glass-fibre reinforced polyester Mechanical strength 2
T6, T5, T4 RAL 9005, deep black (acc. to DIN EN 60079-0: 2006)
for Zone 21 Type 07-3109 mit door Impact energy 7 Nm
glass-fibre reinforced polyester Protection class
II 2D Ex tD [ibD] A21 IP6X
RAL 9011, graphite black (higher degree of protection on request)
T 80 °C to 100 °C (at a distance of 5 K)
Type 07-3113 with door EN 60529/IEC 60529
II 2 (1)D Ex tD [iaD] A21 IP6X 3
High-quality stainless steel 304 IP 54/IP 65
T 80 °C to 100 °C (at a distance of 5 K)
Ambient temperature
High-quality stainless steel 316L  Electrical data
(special design on request)
Enclosure with lid
-20 °C to +40 °C Rated voltage
-55 °C to +70 °C Type 07-3136 with door up to 1000 V 4
High-quality stainless steel 316L
Certification Rated curent
PTB 02 ATEX 1159 for Zone 1 max. 160 A depending on devices fitted
IBExU00ATEX1079 for Zone 21 max. 125 A (for Zone 21)
IECEx PTB 10.0043
(Further certifications on request)
5
6
Mounting dimensions
for switching and light elements according Configuration data for control stations
to EN 60947-5-1
Type of enclosure 07-31 -
40*
7
Dimensions Width Height Depth
Nominal voltage AC V / DC V
∅ 30.3 + 0.3
Threaded glands
70
3 + 0.1
16.5 + 0.2
* Recommended distance for mushroom

pushbutton, emergency switch as well as
03-0330-0214/B-05/11-BCS-201185/2
position selector with protective shroud:

100 mm (3.94 in).
43
Features
 The right size/material enclosure
 Optimum functionality thanks to the great
variety of components
 Customised planning and implementation
 Certified to many standards
Description
For explosion-proof local controllers BARTEC The supply range includes enclosures made of
offers an extensive range of polyester enclosures aluminium, polyester and stainless steel. These
with screw fixing lid and hinged doors. are fitted with certified modules and glands at
points of penetration in the wall of the enclosure.
The enclosures must be produced in compliance
with the requirements for the “Increased Safety“ Fields of application
type of protection or “Protection by Enclosure“.
Chemical and petrochemical industry, process
Depending on the specification and number of and plant engineering, pharmaceutical and food
equipment, various enclosure types and sizes are industry, OFF SHORE areas.
available. The control stations will be equipped
Thanks to their great variety, the enclosure are
according to your individual requirements with
particularly suited for local control stations and
control units, alarm units, display units and bus
bus interface units.
interface modules.
Industrial serial products can also be fitted in the
controllers for Zone 22 with the tD “Protection by
Enclosure“ type of protection.
The components are mounted either on DIN rails
or installed on the front lid. Depending on the
design and requirements, BARTEC not only
supplies control units but also offers the complete
wiring to terminal blocks.
03-0330-0595/A-05/11-BCS-306762/1
44
Explosion protection Technical data Seals

EPDM (Standard)
Ex protection type Material -20 °C to +85 °C 1
(depending on the components installed) Type 07-3101 with lid
aluminium PU (Standard at 07-3109)
for Zone 2 -20 °C to +80 °C
ALSi 12, pressure or chill casting
II 3 G Ex nA nC nL [nL] RAL 7001 silver grey Silicone
IIA, IIB, IIC T6, T5 or T4 -55 °C to +100 °C
II 3(1) G Ex nA nC nL [ia] glass-fibre reinforced polyester Mechanical strength 2
IIA, IIB, IIC T6, T5 or T4 RAL 9005, deep black (acc. to DIN EN 60079-0: 2006)
II 3(2) G Ex nA nC nL [ib] Type 07-3109 mit door Impact energy 7 Nm
IIA, IIB, IIC T6, T5 or T4 glass-fibre reinforced polyester Protection class
RAL 9011, graphite black (higher degree of protection on request)
for Zone 22
Type 07-3113 with door EN 60529/IEC 60529
II 3D Ex tD A22 IP6X 3
High-quality stainless steel 304 IP 54/IP 65
T 80 °C to 100 °C
II 3(1)D Ex tD [iaD] A22 IP6X  Electrical data
High-quality stainless steel 316L
T 80 °C to 100 °C
Enclosure with lid Rated voltage
II 3(2)D Ex tD [ibD] A22 IP6X up to 1000 V
Type 07-3136 with door 4
T 80 °C to 100 °C
High-quality stainless steel 316L Rated curent
Ambient temperature max. 160 A depending on devices fitted
(special design on request) max. 125 A (for Zone 22)
-20 °C to +40 °C
-55 °C to +70 °C
5
6
Mounting dimensions
for switching and light elements according Configuration data for control stations
to EN 60947-5-1
Type of enclosure A7-31 -
40*
7
Dimensions Width Height Depth
Nominal voltage AC V / DC V
∅ 30.3 + 0.3
Threaded glands
70
3 + 0.1
16.5 + 0.2
* Recommended distance for mushroom

pushbutton, emergency switch as well as
03-0330-0595/A-05/11-BCS-306762/2
position selector with protective shroud:

100 mm (3.94 in).
45
Limit Monitor for rotary actuator for Zone 1 + 2 and Zone 21 + 22
Description
The limit value transmitters of Types 07-31..-.../... are deployed in conjunction
with pneumatic actuators on valves and fittings.
They serve to signal the "open/closed" status of a fitting. This end position
is communicated via two (max. six) pressure-proof enclosed limit switches
with the appropriate connection and mounting elements, or by intrinsically
safe initiators according to NAMUR.
To ensure mechanical adaptability to the pneumatic actuators, we supply
4 consoles according to VDI/VDE 3845.
The BARTEC limit monitors can be used in hazardous (potentially explosive)
areas in Zone 1 and 2 in accordance with the certified explosion sub-groups
IIA, IIB and IIC and the temperature classes T5/T6 and in Zone 21 and 22 in
Limit Monitor accordance with the certified max. surface temperature.
Selection chart for standard polyester limit value transmitters

Polyester enclosure black (220 x 120 x 90 mm) Console (dimensions in mm)
for Zone 1 + 2 and 21 + 22 Order no.
A B H
Ex ed Console VDI/VDE 3845 130 50 75 07-31B1-2209/9004
Picture 1 Console VDI/VDE 3845 130 30 55 07-31B1-2209/9003
Console VDI/VDE 3845 80 30 55 07-31B1-2209/9002
Console VDI/VDE 3845 80 20 45 07-31B1-2209/9001
Console with connection dimensions ISO 5211 F05 without console 07-31B1-2209/9007
Polyester enclosure black (110 x 75 x 55 mm) for Zone 1 + 2 and 21 + 22

Ex ed Console VDI/VDE 3845 130 50 75 07-31B1-1105/9005
Console VDI/VDE 3845 80 30 55 07-31B1-1105/9003
Console VDI/VDE 3845 80 20 45 07-31B1-1105/9002
Polyester enclosure black (110 x 75 x 55 mm) for Zone 1 + 2 and 21 + 22
Ex i Console VDI/VDE 3845 130 50 75 07-31B2-1105/9005

Console VDI/VDE 3845 80 30 55 07-31B2-1105/9003
Console VDI/VDE 3845 80 20 45 07-31B2-1105/9002
03-0330-0162/A-02/10-BCS-129314/1
46
Limit Monitor for rotary actuator for Zone 1 + 2 and Zone 21 + 22
Explosion protection Technical data

Ex protection dependent on the installed parts Protection class Enclosure IP 65 according to EN 60529
1
type (max.) II 2G Ex d e IIC T6 or T5 and IEC 60529
II 2D Ex td A21 IP 6X T80 °C, 90 °C, 95 °C Material Type 07-31A cast aluminium
Type 07-31B polyester black
Certification IBExU02ATEX1126
Type 07-31D high quality stainless steel
Mounting console and according to DIN EN ISO 5211 (DIN 3337)
connection dimensions resp. VDI/VDE 3845 2
Connection Ex glands M20 x 1.5 resp. M16 x 1.5
Picture 1 220
Polyester enclosure 220 x 120 x 90 mm
3
M20
M 20 x 1.5
x 1,5
90
90
Built-in
37
2 microswitches
Ex protection type Ex d IIC
(H)
4
B
Switching function changeover contact

A
A
Cable connection via Ex e modular terminals. An Ex e cable gland
is provided for the cable connection M20 x 1.5 (6 to 12).
120
The version with enclosure dimensions 220 x 120 x 90 mm

optionally provides additional terminals for the connection of a 5
magnetic valve.
Picture 2 110
AA -- AA
M16 x 1.5
Polyester enclosure 110 x 75 x 55 mm 6
55
55
27
27
Built-in
2 micro-switches
(H)(H)
Ex protection type Ex d IIC

BB
Switching function NO contact 7

ø 14
A
The cable is connected to Ex e-rail-mounted terminals.

An EEx e-cable gland is provided to insert the cable
M16 x 1.5 (5 to 10).
75
75
A A
Picture 3 110
A A- -AA
MM16
16 x x1,5
1.5 Polyester enclosur 110 x 75 x 55 mm
55
55
Built-in
27
27
2 slit initiators non-contact,

inductive according to DIN 19234
(H)(H)
NAMUR
BB
03-0330-0162/A-02/10-BCS-129314/2
øØ 14
A The cable is connected to Ex i-rail-mounted terminals.
An Ex i-cable gland is provided to insert the cable M16 x 1.5 (5 to 10).
M16 x 1.5
75
75
AA AA
47
Aluminium enclosures Ex d flameproof control unit
Aluminium enclosures
Features
 Variety of covers
Ex protection type
 Variety of connection possibilities II 2(1)G Ex de ia/ib [ia]IIC T6, T5/T4
II 2G Ex d ia/ib [ib]IIC T6, T5/T4
 Bushings can be fitted on all sides
Parial certification
 Flange surfaces for mounting enclousers
Empty enclosure
 Low weight PTB 03 ATEX 1137 U
Certification
Complete device
PTB 03 ATEX 1138
Description
This compact BARTEC Ex d enclosure is ideal for Technical data
the installation of standard electrical devices or
controls. Protecion class
min. IP 54/IEC 60529
The enclosure are light and versatileke when it
comes to connection systems. They can be Enclosure material
flanged on and allow electrical or mechanical aluminium (GK-AL)
buhings on the sides or the lid. Thanks to the Electrical connection
various lid versions you can mount display units directly via a cable entry or Ex e enclosure
or devices with operator buttons. Installation of
Ex i assemblies is furthermore permitted Surface
acylic paint
 directly via cable insertion similar to RAL 7016
 indirectly via line bushing and Ex e Temperature class
terminal enclosure T5/T6
Note: Weight
The use of an empty enclosure requires an approx. 4 kg
acceptance inspection by a notified body.
03-0330-0223/A-07/10-BCS-A201194/1
48
Aluminium enclosures Ex d/Ex d flameproof control unit
Dimensions closed over

160 18
1
II = 154
II = 113
I = 143
I = 107
125
ø 135
84
18
36
3
160
M4 cover with ∅ 80 mm diameter window

8 tief
160 +1
18
4
L x 60°
138
60°
62
30
ø
°
12
0
60
°
ø 135
ø 80
ø9
5
118
140
24
47
6
Versions to specification, please give particulars in pain text.  Bushing for mechanical parts  Ex e adapter box
 Special mounting plates  Buhings for electrical parts
Selection chart 7
Description Code no.
Ex d enclosure, closed lid 1
Ex d enclosure with ∅ 80 mm diameter window 8
Complete Order No. Empty enclosure 07-4231-1
Control module 07-4230-1

03-0330-0223/A-07/10-BCS-A201194/2
49
Control stations in flameproof enclosures
for Zone 1 + 2 and for Zone 21 + 22
Control stations
in flameproof enclosures
Dimensions Mounting plate Description Explosion protection

The control stations in flameproof enclosure of
Ex protection type
the GUB series in compact design allow standard
II 2D Ex td A21 [ia]
∅6
electronics and control components to be

IP 66 T85 °C or 100 °C
installed. The enclosure is light; numerous
II 2(1)G Ex de [ia] IIC T6 or T5
connection systems can be used; flanging is
possible; can be equipped with electrical or Certification
B
b
mechanical bushings at the edges. KEMA 08 ATEX 0123

The GUB control stations can be applied in
hazardous areas, Zone 1 and Zone 2 as well as in
Technical data
areas endangered by flammable dusts, Zone 21 Protection class
and Zone 22. IEC 60529
a
max. IP 66
A
Enclosure material
copper-free aluminium pressure casting
Surface
Dimensions
Acrylic varnish, similar to RAL 7016
Electrical connection
Directly through cable entry or cable gland
or mounted Ex e enclosure
H
L
I
03-0330-0430/A-07/10-BCS-240848/1
i b
H b2
B
50
Control stations in flameproof enclosures
for Zone 1 + 2 and for Zone 21 + 22
Enclosure
Type Order no. Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)
B b b2 H I i L S 1
GUB 07-4120 116 81 91 120 145 100 165 12 1.6
GUB 0 07-4140 130 89 98 150 174 126 198 12 2.6
GUB 01 07-4150 139 99 108 174 195 150 218 12 3.6

2
GUB 02 07-4160 165 113 130 230 267 196 302 12 6.4
GUB 03 07-4170 217 158 181 276 316 236 356 12 11.4
GUB 04 07-4180 290 185 215 430 480 390 520 16 29.4
Mounting plate 3
Type Enclosure A B a b
GUB 07-4120 80 80 60 48
GUB 0 07-4140 100 100 80 60
GUB 01 07-4150 115 115 90 90 4
GUB 02 07-4160 150 150 130 130
GUB 03 07-4170 170 170 158 158
GUB 04 07-4180 270 270 230 230
5
Selection chart
Enclosure size Code Cover variants Code

no. no.
120 x 120 GUB 2 6

150 x 150 GUB 0 4 closed 1
174 x 174 GUB 01 5
230 x 230 GUB 02 6

with window 7
276 x 276 GUB 03 7 7
only for GUB 0, GUB 01, GUB 02, GUB 03
430 x 430 GUB 04 8
Complete order no. 07-41 0-1 61

Please enter code number. Technical date subject to change withiout notice.
03-0330-0430/A-07/10-BCS-240848/2
51
Flameproof control panels Ex de IIC
Control and switchgear units

with metal flameproof enclosures
Description Technical data

These BARTEC enclosures offer a variety of
options for control equipment in Ex areas. Ex protection type max. Power dissipation
Flameproof enclosures in compliance standard depends on the fitted components; observe max. 80 W to 1350 W
with EN are available for electrical devices such the specifications on the type label (depends on the version and type of
as contactors, relays, barriers, electronic protection)
II 2G Ex de ia/ib [ia] IIA, IIB, IIC
controllers and PLC-D/A-modules. T6, T5, T4 Protection class
BARTEC flameproof cable bushings are provided II 2G Ex de ia/ib [ib] IIA, IIB, IIC according to IEC 60529
for cable interconnections between the Ex d & EEx T6, T5, T4 IP 54 (IEC 60529)
e enclosures. Inside the Ex e enclosure the IP 66 on request
conductors are connected to Ex e terminal blocks Certification
The pushbuttons, switches and LEDs are located PTB 03 ATEX 1024 Rated cross-section of conductor
on the cover of the EEx e enclosure. up to 300 mm2
Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +40 °C Weight
approx. 8 kg to approx. 320 kg
Mechanical strength
Impact energy max. 7 Nm
03-0330-0220/A-10/10-BCS-A201191/1
52
Flameproof control panels Ex de IIC
Dimensions
Selection chart (Dimensions in mm)

A B C D E F G H J K Order no.1
6
210 210 187 145 180 203 2 x ø14 128 216 450 07-4310-046./....
210 210 187 145 180 - 2 x ø14 128 216 450 07-4310-056./....
320 320 295 255 180 203 2 x ø14 128 326 634 07-4320-046./....
7
320 320 295 255 180 - 2 x ø14 128 326 634 07-4320-056./....
320 320 295 255 300 329 2 x ø14 252 326 634 07-4340-046./....
320 320 295 255 300 - 2 x ø14 252 326 634 07-4340-056./....
430 430 405 365 300 329 4 x ø14 252 326 744 07-4350-046./....
430 430 405 365 300 - 4 x ø14 252 326 744 07-4350-056./....
650 650 600 505 480 517 4 x ø24 252 345 1100 07-4370-047./....
650 650 600 505 480 - 4 x ø24 252 345 1100 07-4370-057./....
430 650 405 505 300 329 4 x ø14 252 326 964 07-4380-046./....
03-0330-0220/A-10/10-BCS-A201191/2
430 650 405 505 300 - 4 x ø14 252 326 964 07-4380-056./....
1
Version without inspection window.
If required, the d enclosure can be supplied with an inspection window. (Please ask!)
53
Flameproof control units Ex d IIB
Ex d control units

 Standard components Explosive atmospheres can occur wherever
 Cost-effective; also applies to spare parts flammable gases, liquids or materials are
 Easy-to-service processed, transported and stored. It is therefore
necessary to take appropriate measures to prevent
 Expandible
possible explosions. BARTEC protects people and
the environment by the safety of components,
systems and plant safe.
Description
When the 94/9/EC (ATEX 95) guideline comes
The BARTEC ATEX certified Ex d control panels
into force on 01/07/2003, explosion protected
are constructed according to protection type
operating equipment must be properly installed
Ex d, flameproof encapsulation. Standard
in accordance with EN 60079-14. Our safety
components such as switches, contactors and
standards comply to the national directives for
relays are mounted in an explosionproof
commissioning, maintenance and repair of
enclosure constructed in such a way as to keep
electrical devices; construction and
internal explosions from igniting the surrounding
manufacturing according to the CENELEC
atmosphere.
standards EN 60079-0/EN 60079-11/
Ex d control panels are usually custom-built in EN 60079-18/EN 60079-25.
close cooperation with the customer himself for
his special application. Three Ex groups of flammable gases can be
introduced following safety gaps and/or minimum
Version ignition currents determined in experiments.
Flameproof control panels are available either
IIA e. g. ethane, methane, petrol
with direct cable-entries through Ex d cable-
glands or with indirect cable-entries through a IIB e. g. ethylene, dimethylether, towngas
junction box with protection type increased safety IIC e. g. hydrogen, acethylene, sulphur
Ex e. carbonate
The electrical wiring between Ex d and Ex e Further selection criteria is the categorizing into
enclosure will be done through Ex d line temperature classes. The device temperature is
bushings. added to a supposed ambient temperature of
03-0330-0220/A-05/11-BCS-A201191/3
Fields of application +40 °C and divided in the following six

temperature classes:
 Zone 1 + 2 and zone 21 + 22
 Gas groups IIA and IIB T1 +450 °C
T2 +300 °C
 Temperature class T4/T5 or T6
T3 +200 °C
T4 +135 °C
T5 +100 °C
T6 +85 °C
54
Flameproof control units Ex d IIB
Explosive areas have three different zones:

Zone 0
(Category 1G-devices necessary) Ex protection type Nominal voltage 1
II 2G Ex d...IIB, IIB+H2 AC 1000 V
A place in which an explosive atmosphere T6 or T4 DC 1500 V
consisting of a mixture with air of flammable II 2(1, 2 or 3)G Ex d...IIB, IIB+H2
substances in the form of gas, vapour or mist is Operating voltage
T6 or T5
present continuously, for long periods or 25 kV
II 2D Ex td...A21 IP6X
frequently. T80 °C to T130 °C Rated current
II 2(1, 2 or 3)D Ex tD...A21 IP6X 2
Zone 1 1000 A
(Category 1G- or 2G-devices necessary) T80 °C to T130 °C
Protection class
A place in which an explosive atmosphere Certification IP 65/IP 66/IP 67
consisting of a mixture with air or flammable KEMA 08 ATEX 0123
Material
substances in the form of gas, vapour or mist is Alumium alloy < (Cu 0.05%)
likely to occur in normal operation occasionally. Stainless steel 1.4404 3
Zone 2
(Category 1G-, 2G- or 3G-devices necessary)
A place in which an explosive atmosphere
consisting of a mixture with air of flammable
substances in the form of gas, vapour or mist is 4
not likely to occur in normal operation but, if it
does occur, will persist for a short period only.
Electrical control panels contain switches, relays,
pushbutton etc. which may produce a spark when
they switch. In order to keep such sparks or other Selection chart
hot spots from causing an explosion, the 5
components are housed within flameproof Name Dimensions (mm) outside Dimensions (mm) inside empty weight
enclosures. width height depth width height depth kg
EJB 1 198 298 197 140 240 145 8.5
EJB 2 218 418 208 160 360 150 14.2

6
EJB 3 278 358 268 220 300 210 17.8
EJB 3B 278 358 208 220 300 150 16.4
EJB 4 332 432 288 260 360 230 24.1

7
EJB 4B 332 432 223 260 360 165 23.2
EJB 45 380 560 295 490 305 210 35.0
EJB 45B 360 560 245 490 305 160 27.0
EJB 5 432 632 341 360 560 275 56.5
EJB 5B 432 632 271 360 560 205 49.9
EJB 503 432 632 397 360 560 330 61.6
EJB 55 510 710 455 430 630 380 98.6
EJB 55B 510 710 350 430 630 280 77.4
EJB 6 640 860 470 540 760 315 170.0

03-0330-0220/A-05/11-BCS-A201191/4
EJB 6B 640 860 370 540 760 215 150.0
EJB 7 700 1000 500 590 890 340 235
EJB 7B 700 1000 400 590 890 240 210
It is possible to combine the various enclosures.
55
Control, regulating and display devices
Description
BARTEC offers two type series of explosion proof
encapsulated enclosures for using electric
components in hazardous (potentially explosive
areas).
Within the scope of the EC model test certification,
these can be fitted with industrial standard units,
such as e.g. small-type motors, printed circuit
boards and cameras.
The mounted parts are evaluated by BARTEC,
fitted into a suitable housing and provided as a
complete device with the corresponding ATEX
marking.
This housing series offers optimum solution
approaches for control, regulating and display
Control, regulating and display devices devices in Zone 1 and zone 21 hazardous areas.
Ex protection type
Typ 07-61.1.. V < 100 cm3
II 2G Ex de IIC T6/T5
II 2D Ex tD A 21 IP 66
T 80 °C or T 95 °C
PTB 03 ATEX 1026
Typ 07-61.2.. 100 cm3 < V < 2750 cm3

II 2G Ex de [ia/ib] IIC T6, T5 or T4
II 2D Ex tD [iaD/ibD] A21 IP 6X
T 80 °C or T 95 °C
PTB 03 ATEX 1051
Technical data
Protection class
Enclosure material
Metall
Surface
bare, electro-plated or varnished
Order no.
07-61.1-...
07-61.2-...
03-0330-0428/A-07/10-BCS-240846/1
56
Control, regulating and display devices
Description
The control, regulating- and display devices are assembled out of the following modules to suit the
required function. 1
The size of the equipment depends on the components, power dissipation and the required housing
volume.
2
Selection chart
Front flange Enclosure Rear flange
closed ∅ 30 mm to max. 25 cm3 volume with multicore tube encapsulated 3

directly in the housing
e. g. for vibration measuring instrument or ∅ 45 mm to max. 3
100 cm volume
printed circuit board installation only up to a maximum 60 mm housing
∅ 60 mm to max. 200 cm3 volume
diameter
∅ 90 mm to max. 1000 cm3 volume
∅ 120 mm to max. 2750 cm3 volume 4
5
with cable entry
with shaft bushing

e. g. for small motors, rotary encoders
6
or switches
with Ex d screwed cable gland 7

not suitable for gas subgroup IIC when
sparking parts have been fitted.
with inspection glass

e. g. for cameras, optoelectronic units
Displays
Flange with Ex e connection housing

03-0330-0428/A-07/10-BCS-240846/2
57
Potentiometer max. 4 W with individual leads
Features Technical data

 High IP-protection class Protection class
 Small design
Enclosure
 Simple installation nickel-plated brass (CuZn)
Tightning torque (for nuts)
200 Ncm
Resistance characteristic
Potentiometer linear
cores 2 1 3 GNYE
4GAF - 0.75
 Cemented wire-wound resistors:
Description Resistance values/power ratings
see selection chart
These up to 4 W potentionmeters show that Ex
potentiometers can be small and compact. Resistance tolerance
The external dimensions are approximately the ±5%
same as those of standard industrial potentio- Linearity tolerance
meter enclosures. Central fixing in a single hole max. 3 % of final value
and the standard size of shaft have been
includend. From the variety of resistors on the Insulation resistance
market we have chosen cemented wire-wound ≥ 100 MΩ
resistors and carbon film resistors and developed Rotation
a standard-program range.The metal Ex d electr./mech. 250°/270°
enclosures are tailored to the dimensions of the
End stop strength
resistors and feature a standard 30 mm diameter. 30 Ncm
The potentiometers have been designed so that
the stated nominal capacities can be fully Weight with cores (0.5 m)
exploited at temperature class T6 or T5 and be 180 g
deployed in zones 1 and 2.  Carbon-film resistors on ceramic:
They can be fastened and secured against twisting
in a number of ways. Two nuts are included in Resistance values/power ratings
each consignment. At an extra charge BARTEC see selection chart
provides either threaded holes in the front panel Insulation resistance
of the enclosure or an antirotation pin. The length ≥ 100 MΩ
of the encapsulated numbered cores can be
specified by the customer. The potentiometers are Rotation
electr./mech. 270°
Ex-certified by means of a PTB component
certificate. End stop strength
If potentiometers have connecting wires, these 100 Ncm
must be laid with protection. We have developed
Weight with cores (0.5 m)
terminals and enclosures especially for proper 200 g
connection of the ends of the wires in explosive
atmospheres. The most important data, such as  Precision wire-wound resistors:
resistance values, power ratings and dimensions Resistance values/power ratings
can be found in the table on the right. We also see selection chart
supply accessories, such as rotary and pointer
knobs, scales and slip couplings. Insulation resistance
≥ 1000 MΩ
Explosion protection ±5%
Linearity tolerance
Ex protection type
to 500 Ω ± 1 %
II 2G Ex d IIC
03-0330-0164/A-10/10-BCS-129471/1
> 500 Ω ± 0.5 %

I M2 Ex d I
Rotation
Certification
electr./mech. 320°
PTB 03 ATEX 1025 U
End stop strength
Temperature class 100 Ncm
T6 to T4
Weight with cores (0.5 m)
Ambient temperature 170 g
-55 °C to +40 °C/+60 °C/+80 °C
58
Potentiometer max. 4 W with individual leads
Dimensions in mm Selection chart

Resistor type/ Temperature Complete 1
standard resistance values class/ order no.
Cemented wire-wound resistors for (stock items printed bold) power rating (indicate resistance values
high power ratings in plain text)
Cemented wire-wound resistors

20 45
higher power ratings
11 2
10 Ω 68 Ω 470 Ω 3.3 k Ω
0,8
12 Ω 82 Ω 560 Ω 3.9 k Ω
M12 x 1,5
15 Ω 100 Ω 680 Ω 4.7 k Ω

T6/2.5 W 07-6612- 111
∅6
18 Ω 120 Ω 820 Ω 5.6 k Ω

resp. resp.
22 Ω 150 Ω 1kΩ 6.8 k Ω
∅ 12
∅ 30
T4/4 W 07-6613- 111

27 Ω 180 Ω 1.2 k Ω 8.2 k Ω
3
33 Ω 220 Ω 1.5 k Ω 10 k Ω
39 Ω 270 Ω 1.8 k Ω
47 Ω 330 Ω 2.2 k Ω
56 Ω 390 Ω 2.7 k Ω
Carbon film resistors

4
100 Ω 1kΩ 10 k Ω 100 k Ω
Carbon-film resistors 220 Ω 2.2 k Ω 22 k Ω 220 k Ω T6/2 W 07-6612- 113
Precision wire-wound resistors 470 Ω 4.7 Ω 47 k Ω 470 k Ω
1MΩ
20 40
11 Precision wire-wound resistors 5
0,8 10 Ω 100 Ω 1kΩ 10 k Ω
20 Ω 200 Ω 2kΩ 20 k Ω
M12 x 1,5
T6/1.2 W 07-6612- 112

50 Ω 500 Ω 5kΩ
∅6
Lead length:
∅ 12
∅ 30
100 mm up to 1000 mm
In 100-mm steps 6
5 = standard 500 mm
Special versions - please indicate particulars in plain text

 Anti-rotation pin on front of enclosure  Side entry of leads
 Threaded holes on front of enclosure  Other resistance values
7
Accessories/Order no.
Rotary knob shaft ∅ 6 mm Pointer knob shaft ∅ 6 mm Scale 0 - 100 Slip clutch adjustable
Order no. 03-5401-0002 Order no. 05-0144-0112 (270°) to 50 Ncm, shaft ∅ 6 mm
Order no. 03-5401-0001
Order no. 05-0144-0127 (320°) Order no. 03-5600-0001
03-0330-0164/A-07/10-BCS-129471/2
23
19
10
17
26
12
∅ 29 20 44
59
Potentiometer max. 8 W with cable tail
Potentiometer
Features Explosion protection  Carbon-film resistors on ceramic

 High IP-protection class Resistance values/power ratings
Ex protection type
 Simple installation II 2G Ex d IIC T6 resp. T5 see selection chart
 No further approvals required Certification Insulation resistance
PTB 03 ATEX 1026 ≥ 100 MΩ
Description Ambient temperature Rotation
-20 °C to +70 °C electr./mech. 270°
This standard range of up to 8 W potentiometers
with wire-wound resistors show that Ex End stop strength
potentiometers can be small and compact. 100 Ncm
Technical data Weight with cable (1 m)

The external dimensions are approximately the
240 g
same as those of standard industrial potentio-
Protection class
meter enclosures. Central fixing in a single hole
and the standard size of shaft have been included.
 Precision wire-wound resistors
Enclosure
From the variety of resistors on the market we have metal Resistance values/power ratings
chosen the most commonly used types and see selection chart
developed a standard program range. Tightening torque (for nuts)
200 Ncm Resistance tolerance
The metal Ex d enclosures are tailored to the 1 turn ± 5 % / 10 turns > 50 Ω ± 3 %
dimensions of the resistors and feature a standard Resistance characteristic
30 mm diameter. The potentiometers have been linear Linearity tolerance
designed so that the stated nominal capacities can 1 turn to 500 Ω ± 1 %
Electrical connection > 500 Ω ± 0.5 %
be fully exploited at temperature class T6 or T5 cable
and be deployed in zones 1 and 2. H05VV-F4G 0.75 10 turns potentiometer ± 0.25 %
They can be fixed and protected against turning GY BK BN GNYE Insulation resistance
in different ways. Two nuts are included in each min. 1 000 MΩ
consignment. At an extra charge BARTEC  Cemented wire-wound resistors
Rotation
provides either threaded holes in the front panel Resistance values/power ratings electr./mech. 1 turn 320° ± 2°
of the enclosure or an antirotation pin. See selection chart 10 turns 10 x 360° + 10°
For the correct connection of the cable ends we Resistance tolerance Weight with cable (1 m)
have developed special Ex terminals and ±5% 1 turn 210 g/10 turns 300 g
enclosures. The most important data such as
Linearity tolerance End stop strength
resistance values, power ratings and dimensions
max. 3 % of final value 1 turn 100 Ncm/10 turns 30 Ncm
can be found in the table on the right. We also
supply accessories such as rotary and pointer Insulation resistance
knobs, scales and slip clutches. ≥ 100 MΩ
In addition to the standard models all other Rotation
versions such as tandem potentiometers, electr./mech. 250°/270°
potentiometers with microswitches, non-standard End stop strength
shafts or larger resistor diameters can be 30 Ncm
encapsulated in enclosures of up to 120 mm
03-0330-0165/A-07/10-BCS-129472/1
diameter. Weight with cable (1 m)

2.5 W 6W 8W
250 g 320 g 550 g
60
Potentiometer max. 8 W with cable tail

20 b
d 1
0.8 Resistor type/ Temperature Complete
standard resistance values class/ order no.
(stock items printed bold) power rating (indicate resistance
e
c
a
f
values in plain text)
Cemented wire-wound resistors 2

a b c d e f higher power ratings
10 Ω 180 Ω 3.3 k Ω to T6/2.5 W 07-6622- 111
∅ 30 55 ∅6 11 M12 x 1.5 ∅ 12 12 Ω 220 Ω 3.9 k Ω 10 k Ω resp. resp.
15 Ω 270 Ω 4.7 k Ω T5/3 W 07-6623- 111
18 Ω 330 Ω 5.6 k Ω
22 Ω 390 Ω 6.8 k Ω 3
27 Ω 470 Ω 8.2 k Ω
33 Ω 560 Ω 10 k Ω to T6/5 W 07-6624- 111
∅ 45 90 ∅6 11 M12 x 1.5 ∅ 12 39 Ω 680 Ω 12 k Ω 20 k Ω resp. resp.
47 Ω 820 Ω 15 k Ω T5/6 W 07-6625- 111
56 Ω 1kΩ 18 k Ω
68 Ω 1.2 k Ω 20 k Ω
4
82 Ω 1.5 k Ω 22 k Ω
100 Ω 1.8 k Ω 27 k Ω to T6/7 W 07-6626- 111
∅ 60 87 ∅6 11 M12 x 1.5 ∅ 12 120 Ω 2.2 k Ω 30 k Ω 30 k Ω resp. resp.
150 Ω 2.7 k Ω T5/8 W 07-6627- 111
Carbon-film resistors 100 k Ω 5

100 Ω 1k Ω 10 k Ω 220 k Ω
220 Ω 2.2 k Ω 22 k Ω 470 k Ω T6/2 W 07-6622- 113
470 Ω 4.7 k Ω 47 k Ω 1MΩ
∅ 30 45 ∅6 11 M12 x 1.5 ∅ 12
Precision wire-wound resistors
10 Ω 100 Ω 1kΩ 10 k Ω 6
T6/1.2 W 07-6622- 112
20 Ω 200 Ω 2kΩ 20 k Ω
50 Ω 500 Ω 5kΩ
10 turns potentiometer* 07-6624- 102

20 Ω 500 Ω 10 k Ω ▲
∅ 38 50 ∅ 6.35 8 3/8-32 ∅ 10.3 50 Ω 1kΩ 20 k Ω T6/2 W Lead length: 7
100 Ω 2kΩ 50 k Ω 5 = standard 500 mm
200 Ω 5kΩ 100 k Ω 0 = length in plain text
Special versions,
Please indicate particulars in plain text
 Anti-rotation pin on front of enclosure  Side entry of cable
 Threaded holes on front of enclosure  Other resistance values
Accessories/Order no.
Rotary knob shaft ∅ 6 mm Pointer knob shaft ∅ 6 mm scale 0 - 100 More turn drive* Slip clutch,adjustable
Order no. 03-5401-0001 Order no. 03-5401-0002 Order no. shaft ∅ 6.35 mm to 50 Ncm, shaft ∅ 6 mm
05-0144-0112 (270 °) Order no. 03-5425-0001 Order no. 03-5600-0001
05-0144-0127 (320 °)
275°
23
03-0330-0165/A-07/10-BCS-129472/2
35
°
10
17
19
12
26
26
∅ 29 20 44 46
*Max. wall thickness for installing a switch panel = 2.5 mm
61
Customer requirements Control stations
Customer BARTEC
Company Sales employee
Street Offer Order
Postcode/City Project name/Application number
Country Customer number
Contact person Order value
E-mail Deadline Offer
Phone Fax Delivery
System options Was a similar system already supplied to the customer?
no yes
Please fill in the appropriate form
Description
Flameproof control station Form 1
Local control station Formt 2

Documentation
Enclosures for small control, Form 3
Wiring diagram Technical description
regulating and display devices
Drawings I/O list
Rated voltage V
Application Sub Ex area
Gas Zone 1 (2G) Zone 2 (3G) IIA IIB IIC
Temperature class T4 T5
T6
Temperature range
Dust Zone 21 (2D) Zone 22 (3D) -20 °C to +40 °C deviant °C
Max. surface temperature 80 °C 95 °C Interior Exterior

03-0330-0596-10/09-BCS-306763/1
Further informations
62
Form 1 Enclosure sizes (mm)
Flameproof control stations Length Width Height

1
or max. available installation dimensions (mm)
Length Width Height
Direct cable entry yes no 2

Ex e/i connection range yes no
Installations/Customer provision
Quantity Manufacturer Type Dimensions (mm) Power dissipation (W) Data sheet
Direct cable entry

Terminals Cable glands
2
Quantity Nominal cross section (mm ) Ex i or Ex e Quantity Thread size Clamping range 7
Ex e/i connection range

Terminals Cable glands
Quantity Nominal cross section (mm2) Ex i or Ex e Quantity Thread size Clamping range Ex i or Ex e
03-0330-0596-10/09-BCS-306763/2
63
Form 2 Enclosure sizes (mm) )
Local control station Length Width Height
or max. available installation dimensions (mm)
Length Width Height
Material Polyester
Stainless steel V2A
Stainless steel V4A
Aluminium
Installations/Customer provision
Quantity Manufacturer Type Dimensions (mm) Power dissipation (W) Data sheet
Terminals
Quantity Nominal cross section (mm2) Ex i or Ex e
Cable glands
Quantity Thread size Clamping range Ex i or Ex e

03-0330-0596-10/09-BCS-306763/3
64
Form 3
Enclosures for small control, regulating and display devices

1
2
Information about mounting parts
Type Rotating electrical machines

e. g. Motors/power-wheel instruments
07-61.1.. V < 100 cm3 3
Max. rotation U/min
07-61.2.. 100 cm3 V < 2750 cm3
Max. voltage V
Power input A
Enclosure material 4
Power consumption W
Aluminium bare
Shaft version like examples like drawings
Aluminium varnished RAL colour
Fittings exchangeably yes no
Stainless steel V2A 5
Stainless steel V4A Transmitter/Receiver
Max. voltage V
6
Power input A
Power consumption W
Radiation intensity
7
Inspection glass, size mm
Instruments without spindle/inspection glass

(e. g. vibration measuring instrument)
Max. voltage V
Power input A
Power consumption W
03-0330-0596-10/09-BCS-306763/4
65
Pressurised control panels
Control unit APEX 2003.00
Description Terminals
The control unit APEX 2003.00 controls and 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
monitors the purging and operating cycle of Pressure sensors
standard enclosures. MIN A = 0 to 25 mbar
Purging gas input is via a digital valve up to MIN B = 0 to 25 mbar
NW 7.7 (74 m3/h) or a proportional valve up to MAX = 0 to 25 mbar
NW 2 (5 m3/h). MAX 1 = 0 to 25 mbar
DIFF A = 0 to 25 mbar
The purge time is set at the control module via a DIFF B = 0 to 25 mbar
turn switch, the setting of the pushbuttom values
is via pushbutton or RS 485 interface. Purging time
0 to 99 min; 5 sec. dropout delay
The control unit provides 4 freely programmable
relay outputs. Weight
4.3 kg
 Electrical data
Ex protection type
II 2(1)G Ex e d ib [ia Ga px] IIC T4/T6 Supply voltage
or AC 230 V (AC 115 V) 10%
Control unit Ex e d [ia Ga px] IIC T6 Power consumption
Certification PV = 15 W/230 V
DMT 99 ATEX E082 Make contact
Features INMETRO 2004 EC02 CP042 K 2/3, 5 A for cos ϕ = 1
 4 voltage free contacts Ambient temperature K 4 and K 5, voltage free
 3-line LCD display -20 °C to +40 °C Temperature switching value (optional)
 LED status display 0 °C to +80 °C
 Modular design
Technical data
 Fail-safe control
Guidelines/norms/certifications
Dimensions/mounting positions Directive 2004/108/EC
Directive 94/9/EC
200 120
Construction
Ex e protective enclosure
with viewport lid
Selection chart 7 W version
Enclosure material
250
glass-fibre reinforced polyester Orifice Code no. Version Code no.
Protection class 12 mm 4
230 V 1
IP 65 15 mm 5
115 V 2
18 mm 6
Wiring diagram/terminal assignment

Sensor module Key switch Temperature switch Link for adjustment 07-3711-121 / 000
Complete order no.
Ex i
Ex d Selection chart 15 W version

1-12 5 8 17 18 15 16 19 20 23 24
Control module Orifice Code no. Version Code no.
12 mm 4
03-0330-0219/B-03/11-BCS-201199/1
A1
230 V 1
K1 K2/3 K4 K5 15 mm 5
115 V 2
18 mm 6
no longer
in use Purging valve
Ex e
25 26 27 34 35 36 39 40 38 41 42 PE 43 44 45 46 PE
07-3711-121 / 082
-x1
Complete order no.
Supply
68
Control unit APEX 2003.002x
Description Terminals
The control unit APEX 2003.002x controls and 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
monitors the purging and operating cycle of Pressure sensors 1
standard p enclosures. MIN A = 0 to 25 mbar
Purging gas input is via a digital valve up to MIN B = 0 to 25 mbar
NW 7.7 (74 m3/h) or a proportional valve up to MAX = 0 to 25 mbar
NW 6 (45 m3/h). MAX 1 = 0 to 25 mbar
The purge time is set at the control module via a DIFF B = 0 to 25 mbar 2
turn switch, the setting of the pushbuttom values
is via pushbutton or RS 485 interface. Purging time
These control unit reduce the flushing time by
half against the standard unit. Weight
7.5 kg
3
 Electrical data
Ex protection type
II 2(1)G Ex e d ib [ia Ga px] IIC T4/T6 Supply voltage
or AC 230 V (AC 115 V) 10%
Control unit Ex e d [ia Ga px] IIC T6 Power consumption 4
Certification PV = 15 W/230 V
DMT 99 ATEX E 082 Make contact
Features INMETRO 2004 EC02 CP042 K 2/3, 5 A for cos ϕ = 1
 4 voltage free contacts Ambient temperature K 4 and K 5, voltage free
 3-line LCD display -20 °C to +40 °C Temperature switching value (optional) 5
 LED status display 0 °C to +80 °C
 Modular design
 Fail-safe control Technical data
Dimensions/mounting positions Directive 2004/108/EC 6
Directive 94/9/EC
120 255 Construction
with viewport lid Selection chart 7 W version
Enclosure material Version Code no.
7
250
glass-fibre reinforced polyester

230 V 1
Protection class
115 V 2
IP 65
Wiring diagram/terminal assignment 07-3711-1216/ 017

Sensor module Key switch Temperature switch Link for adjustment Complete order no.
Ex i
Ex d Selection chart 15 W version

1-12 5 8 17 18 15 16 19 20 23 24
Control module Version Code no.
A1 230 V 1
03-0330-0422/B-03/11-BCS-240840
K1 K2/3 K4 K5 115 V 2
no longer
07-3711-1216/ 107
Ex e
25 26 27 34 35 36 39 40 38 41 42 PE 43 44 45 46 PE
Complete order no.
-x1
Supply
69
Control unit APEX 2003.MV
Ex protection type
II 2(1)G Ex e d ib [ia Ga px] IIC T4
Certification
DMT 99 ATEX E 082
Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +40 °C
Technical data
Directive 2004/108/EC
Control unit Directive 94/9/EC
Construction
with viewport lid
Enclosure material
Features Description glass-fibre reinforced polyester
Protection class
 4 voltage free contacts The control unit APEX 2003.MV controls and
IP 65
 3-line LCD display monitors the purging and operating cycle of small
separate Ex p enclosure. Terminals
 LED status display 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
 Modular design The purging gas flow rate during purging is
4100 I/h. The purging time is set via rotary switch Purge gas connection
 Fail-safe control ∅ 10 mm
on the control module, the pressure switching
 Integrated valve switch values via pushbutton or RS 485 interface. Pressure sensors
 10 mm purging gas input MIN A = 0 to 25 mbar
The control unit provides 4 freely programmable
MIN B = 0 to 25 mbar
relay outputs.
MAX = 0 to 25 mbar
MAX 1 = 0 to 25 mbar
Dimensions/mounting positions
255 120 DIFF B = 0 to 25 mbar
Purging time
Weight
5.9 kg
250
 Electrical data
Supply voltage
AC 230 V (AC 115 V) 10 %
Power consumption
PV = 15 W/230 V
Wiring diagram/terminal assignment
Make contact
Sensor module Key switch Temperature switch Link for adjustment K 2/3, 5 A for cos ϕ = 1
K 4 and K 5; voltage free
Temperature switching value (optional)
0 °C to +80 °C
Ex i
Ex d
1-12 5 8 17 18 15 16 19 20 23 24 Selection chart
Control module
Version Code no.
A1
03-0330-0219/B-03/11-BCS-201199/2
230 V 1
K1 K2/3 K4 K5
115 V 2
no longer
Ex e 07-3711-2213/ 000
-x1
25 26 27 34 35 36 39 40 38 41 42 PE 43 44 45 46 PE
Complete order no.
Supply Please enter code number.
70
Control unit APEX 2003.SI
Ex protection type
II 2(1)G Ex e d ib [ia Ga px] IIC T4 1
Certification
DMT 99 ATEX E082
Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +40 °C 2
Technical data
Control unit Guidelines/norms/certifications
Directive 2004/108/EC
Directive 94/9/EC
3
Features Description Construction

 4 voltage free contacts The control unit APEX 2003.SI controls and with viewport lid
 3-line LCD display monitors the purging and operating cycle of Enclosure material
analysers with “Containment Systems“ glass-fiber reinforced, polyester 4
 LED status display
 Modular design Additional function: Protection class
 Fail-safe control By means of additional pressure sensors, a IP 65
 Integrated valve switches for purging proportional valve adjusts the interior enclosure Terminals
gas input and output pressure to a value which is higher than that of 2.5 mm2, fine stranded
the measuring gas.
 10 mm purging gas connection Pressure time 5
 Connection possibility of seperate The purging gas flow rate during purging is MIN A = 0 to 300 mbar
pressure sensors 4100 NI/h at an interior enclosure pressure of MIN B = 0 to 300 mbar
50 mbar. MAX = 0 to 300 mbar
MAX 1 = 0 to 300 mbar
Dimensions/mounting positions 4 freely programmable relay outputs are available
for the separation of data lines.
DIFF B = 0 to 25 mbar 6
400 120
Purging time
0 bis 99 min; 5 sec. dropout delay
Weight
11 kg
250
 Electrical data 7
Supply voltage
AC 230 (AC 115 V) 10 %
Power consumption
PV = 21 W/230 V
Wiring diagram/terminal assignment Make contact
K 2/3, 5 A for cos ϕ = 1
Sensor module Key switch Temperature switch Link for adjustment
K 4 and K 5, voltage free
Temperature switching value (optional)
0 °C to +80 °C
EEx i
Ex d
Selection chart
1-12 5 8 17 18 15 16 19 20 23 24
Kontrollmodul Version Code no.

A1
230 V 1
03-0330-0219/A-07/10-BCS-201199/3
K1 K2/3 K4 K5 115 V 2
no longer
07-3711-3223/ 001
Ex e
25 26 27 34 35 36 39 40 38 41 42 PE 43 44 45 46 PE
Complete order no.
-x1
Supply
71
SILAS Controller
SILAS Controller
Features Description
 Small configuration The SILAS controller serves to monitor
 Easy to handle electrical operating equipment that is set up in
accordance with the „pressurised apparatus
 Separate purging gas input and output
with leakage compensation“ The SILAS
controller serves to monitor electrical operating
equipment that is set up in accordance with the
pressurisedapparatuswithleakagecompensation
It is a complete safety device, which consists of a
Type A7-3741-1110/.000 SILAS controller and a
type 17-51P3-1604 pressure control device. It is
a complete safety device, which consists of a type
A7-3741-1110/*000 SILAS controller and a Type
17-51P3-1604 pressure control device.
It is also necessary to have an optional digital
purging gas valve to supply protective gas.
Dimensions Solution variant pz

110 55,5
1 1. Pressure monitor module

2 (17-51P3-1604)
2. Protective gas outlet
3
3. Pressure reducer (05-0056.)
4. SILAS controller (A7-3741-1100/.000)
4 5. Purging air nozzle
188
6. Optional digital purging gas valve

(e. g. 03-5110-00.)
7. Protective gas supply
5
7
6
Solution variant pD
1 1. Pressure monitor module

2 (17-51P3-1604)
2. Protective gas outlet
3
3. Pressure reducer (05-0056-..)
4. SILAS controller (A7-3741-1100/.000)
03-0330-0597-10/10-BCS-306764/1
4 5. Purging air nozzle

6. Optional digital purging gas valve
(e. g. 03-5110-00..)
7. Protective gas supply
5
6
72
SILAS Controller

Ex protection type/ambient temperature Operating elements 1
II 3G Ex nA nC [pz] IIC T4 LCD display
0 °C up to +60 °C 1 power switch
II 3G Ex nA nC [pz] IIC T6 1 BCD switch for selecting parameters
0 °C up to +40 °C 3 buttons for changing parameters
II 3G Ex tD [pD] A22 IP 54 T85 °C 3 LEDs for displaying switching relay status
1 connection socket for bypass switch
Certification 2
TÜV 09 ATEX 553359 Relay
INMETRO 2009 EC02 CP022 1. Alarm relay (voltage-free)
2. Control relay for purge valve
Approved for
3. Signal relay for status transmission
Zone 2 and Zone 22
Supply voltage
AC 230 V/50 to 60 Hz 3
AC 115 V/50 to 60 Hz
DC 24 V
Power consumption
max. 8 W
Ambient temperature 4
Operation 0 °C to +40 °C (+60 °C)
Storage 0 °C to +60 °C
Pressure range
0 to 25 mbar for all pressure
switching levels
5
Purging time
0 to 60 min. (adjustable)
Weight
approx. 1.2 kg
Protection class 6
Min. IP 54
Assembly
see Operating Instructions SILAS controller
7
Selection chart
Description Rated voltage Code no.
AC 230 V 1
SILAS Controller AC 115 V 2
DC 24 V 3
Complete oder no. A7-3741-1110/ 000

Order no. SILAS Accessories

03-0330-0597-10/10-BCS-306764/2
Pressure monitor
Module Zone 2 or 22
17-51P3-1604
73
Ex p combination cabinets
Ex protection type
II 2G EEx p II T3, T4, T5, T6
II 2G EEx p [ib] II C T3, T4, T5, T6
II 3G Ex pz II T3, T4, T5, T6
II 3D Ex pD 22 IP 54, T80 °C
Certification
TÜV 03 ATEX 2264 (Zone 1)
Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C (T6 max. +40 °C)
Technical data
Ex p combination cabinets Structure
Standard enclosure or
for Zone 1, 2 or 22 tailor-made solutions
Enclosure material
Coated sheet-steel
stainless steel
Protection class
IP 55/IP 65
Description Overpressure range

0 to 25 mbar
The increasing demand of complex automation functions for processes in the field of chemistry, 0 to 300 mbar
pharmacy, oil and gas calls for flexible, safe and maintenance-friendly solutions for measuring, 0 to 1000 mbar
controlling, regulating and visualization tasks, particularly in potentially explosive areas. Complete
Stirring gas
control systems and switchgear, motors, actuators and pumps, open-plan displays, industrial monitors
cleaned compressed air or
incl. keyboards and printers must be made ready for applications in hazardous areas.
inert gas Tmax.= 40 °C
For many applications the Ex p pressurized enclosure is one of the most flexible Ex solutions. Thanks
to this type of protection, non-explosion proof devices can be operated in potentially explosive areas Purging time
of zone 1, 2 and 22. The underlying idea is to prevent an explosive atmosphere from entering a sealed 0 to 99 min; 5 sec. drop-out delayed
protective enclosure by generating a permanent overpressure against the surrounding atmosphere.
With its pressurized Ex p combination cabinet, BARTEC offers a completely new Ex solution for the
control and automation of devices, machines and systems in zone 1, 2 and 22.  Electrical data
Depending on the application, non-explosion-proof control units and switchgear as well as complete Supply voltage
automation systems are mounted into the Ex p combination cabinet. On the basis of the modular APEX max. AC 690 V
2003 overpressure control, which has been certified in accordance with ATEX, modern, operationable
Power consumption
Ex solutions are realized - including the required certification in accordance with
depending on the application
94/9/EC.
The stirring gas overpressure is realized by a compensation of the leakage losses or by permanent Optional switching amplifier
flushing. The EEx p combination cabinet has been designed for an ambient temperature between up to 30 kW
-20 °C and +60 °C in the temperature classes T3 to T5. For temperature class T6, an ambient temperature Guidelines/norms/certifications
between -20 °C and +40 °C is permissible. Directive 2004/108/EC
The maintenance and availability of the explosion-proof devices and system has top priority. Within Directive 94/9/EC
the course of many years, the BARTEC experts have gathered substantial experience with explosion
protection applications as well as the conception of complete system solutions for automation. On the
basis of this know-how, safe and economically efficient solutions ranging from engineering over
production and procurement via commissioning and approval have been developed.
Depending on the application, Ex p solutions are realized with sheet-steel or stainless steel, with
air-conditioning, different lacquer coats, seawater-resistant and tropic-proof. BARTEC solutions also
comprise commissioning and function checks. For integration into the already existing explosion
protection document, a detailed operating manual is supplied. In addition to this, introduction and
03-0330-0383/A-07/10-BCS-222530/1
training measures for qualified staff members may be implemented upon request.
74
Ex p combination cabinets Applications
3
Ex p combination cabinets
Installed components as examples:
 Devices 4
 Printers
 Operator terminals
 Control units
5
 Frequency converters
 Monitors
 Motors
6
Air-conditioning selection
 Operating heating
 Standstill heating
 Air cooler 7
 Air-conditionier
 Water-air cooler
Accessories
 Stirring gas filter systems
 Power amplifier up to 30 kW
 Interposing relays for

data performances
03-0330-0383/A-07/10-BCS-222530/2
 Bypass key switches
75
Digital purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment
Digital purging gas valve

for Ex px operating equipment

The digital purging gas valve, which is activated
Adjusting elements
by the APEX controller, conducts the supplied
Adjustment screw to set the quantity of
purging gas into the Ex px control cabinet.The
leakage air
digital purging gas valve, which is activated by
the APEX controller, conducts the supplied Supply voltage
purging gas into the Ex px control cabinet. AC 230 V/9 W/50 to 60 Hz
AC 115 V/9 W/50 to 60 Hz
During the purging phase the purging gas valve
opens and consequently provides purging Voltage tolerance
pressure in the encapsulated control cabinet. ± 10%
During the purging phase the purging gas valve
opens and consequently provides purging Pressure range
pressure in the encapsulated control cabinet. 0 to 16 bar
After the purging phase the purging gas valve Valve connection
closes. The leakage from the Ex px control cabinet G 3/8" and G 1/2"
is compensated by an integrated adjustable Nominal diameter
leakage air valve. 13 mm
Max. Ex px control cabinet capacity
G 3/8" and G 1/2": 1.000 litres
Control cabinet borehole
Ex protection type G 3/8": 17 mm
II 2G Ex m II T4 G 1/2": 21 mm
Ambient temperature Weight
-10 °C to +40 °C approx. 1.2 kg
Certification Protection class
PTB 00 ATEX 2129X IP 65
Approved for Assembly
Zone 1 and Zone 2 Inside Ex px operating equipment
Scope of supply
Valve with 3-m connection cable
Purging air nozzle
Bulkhead union
Purging air nozzle

03-0330-0598-07/10-BCS-306805/1
Ex px control cabinet Recommended purging Recommended orifice

capacity air nozzle APEX controller
< 50 litres ∅ 2.8 mm 12 mm
≥ 50 litres < 300 litres ∅ 3.9 mm 15 mm
≥ 300 < 700 litres ∅ 4.5 mm 18 mm
≥ 1000 litres ∅ 5.5 mm 2 x 18 mm
76
Digital purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment
Dimensions Selection chart Connection G 3/8"

E
D Digital purging gas valve Purging air nozzle Code no. 1
AC 230 V ∅ 2.0 mm 01
AC 230 V ∅ 2.8 mm 02
B
A
AC 230 V ∅ 3.9 mm 03
AC 230 V ∅ 5.5 mm 04 2
∅ 7.7 mm
F
AC 230 V 05
AC 230 V ∅ 10.7 mm 06
AC 110 V ∅ 2.0 mm 16
C AC 110 V ∅ 2.8 mm 17 3
AC 110 V ∅ 3.9 mm 18
AC 110 V ∅ 5.5 mm 19
Dimensions in mm
AC 110 V ∅ 7.7 mm 40
G 3/8" G 1/2" Type
AC 110 V ∅ 10.7 mm 20 4
100 100 A
72 72 B
56 65 C Complete oder no. 05-0056-00
40 40 D Please enter code number. Technical data subject to change without notice.
40 40 E
5
G 3/8" G 1/2" F
Selection chart Connection G 1/2"
Digital purging gas valve Purging air nozzle Code no.
AC 230 V ∅ 2.0 mm 56
AC 230 V ∅ 2.8 mm 57
6
AC 230 V ∅ 3.9 mm 58
AC 230 V ∅ 5.5 mm 59
AC 230 V ∅ 7.7 mm 60
7
AC 230 V ∅ 10.7 mm 61
AC 110 V ∅ 2.0 mm 50
AC 110 V ∅ 2.8 mm 51
AC 110 V ∅ 3.9 mm 52
AC 110 V ∅ 5.5 mm 53
AC 110 V ∅ 7.7 mm 54
AC 110 V ∅ 10.7 mm 55
Complete oder no. 05-0056-00

03-0330-0598-07/10-BCS-306805/2
77
Proportional purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment
Proportional purging gas valve

for Ex px operating equipment
Description Explosion protection

The proportional purging gas valve activated by
Ex protection type
the APEX controller conducts the supplied
II 2G EEx m II T4
purging gas into the Ex px control cabinet.
Ambient temperature
During the purging phase the purging gas valve -10 °C to +60 °C
opens far enough to allow the max. purging gas
pressure to be reached and ensure purging Certification
pressure in the encapsulated control cabinet. PTB 00 ATEX 2202X
PTB 00 ATEX 2094X
After the purging phase the purging gas valve
closes. The leakage from the Ex px control cabinet permitted for
is compensated by the valve’s linear opening. Zone 1 and Zone 2
Only the actual loss by leakage is compensated

when the proportional purging gas valve is used. Technical data
Supply voltage
G 1/4"
AC 230 V/8 W/50 to 60 Hz
AC 115 V/8 W/50 to 60 Hz
Dimensions mm G 3/8" G 3/8"
AC 230 V/15 W/50 to 60 Hz
AC 115 V/15 W/50 to 60 Hz
Voltage tolerance
56.6
49.4
± 10 %
70
95.3
103.4 Pressure range

0 to 4 bar
/8"
G3
Valve connection
G 3/8" and G 1/4"
Nominal diameter
G 3/8" 6.0 mm
Dimensions mm G 1/4" G 1/4" 2.0 mm
Max. Ex px control cabinet capacity
G 3/8" 1,000 litres
G 1/4" 50 litres
32
46
G 1/4"
67.5
Control cabinet borehole

G 3/8" and G 1/4"
22.5
17 mm
32
64.5 Weight
approx. 1.2 kg
Protection class
03-0330-0599-07/10-BCS-306806
IP 65
Selection chart Proportional purging gas valve G 3/8" und G 1/4" Assembly
Inside Ex px operating equipment
Voltage Order no. purging gas valve G 3/8" Order no. purging gas valve G 1/4"
Scope of supply
AC 230 V 05-0056-0022 05-0056-0047 Valve with 3-m connection cable
Bulkhead union
AC 110 V 05-0056-0024 05-0056-0048
78
Digital purging gas valve for Ex pz operating equipment
1
Digital purging gas valve
for Ex pz operating equipment

The digital purging gas valve activated by the 3
Adjusting elements
SILAS controller conducts the supplied purging
Adjustment screw to set the quantity of
gas into the Ex pz control cabinet. leakage air
During the purging phase the purging gas valve Supply voltage
opens and accordingly ensures purging pressure AC 230 V/6,5 VA/50 to 60 Hz
in the encapsulated control cabinet. AC 115 V/5,6 VA/50 to 60 Hz 4
After the purging phase the purging gas valve DC 24 V/6,0 W
closes. The leakage from the Ex pz control cabinet Voltage tolerance
is compensated by an integrated adjustable ± 10%
Dimensions leakage air valve.
Pressure range
6
0 to 4 bar
5
25
Explosion protection Valve connection

G 3/8"
3000
Ex protection type
II 3G Ex nA T4 Nominal diameter
6,0 mm
Ambient temperature
Control cabinet borehole 6
-10 °C to +40 °C
17 mm
permitted for
Weight
Zone 2
approx. 1,2 kg
Protection class
IP 65
with mounted appliance outlet 7
Assembly
32
∅ 48 Inside Ex pz operating equipment
Scope of supply
Valve with 3-m connection cable
Purging air nozzle
Bulkhead union
90
81
Selection chart Digital purging gas valve

118
Voltage Order no. with purging air nozzle 1) Order no. with purging air nozzle 2)
AC 230 V 03-5110-0026 03-5110-0027

28
4
6,3 AC 115 V 03-5110-0028 03-5110-0030
∅ 27
56
DC 24 V 03-5110-0029 03-5110-0031
03-0330-0600-07/10-BCS-306807
1)
∅ 2.8 mm and ∅ 3.9 mm; 2) ∅ 5.5 mm and ∅ 7.7 mm
79
M Pressure monitor module
Pressure monitor module Zone 1
Technical data
Temperature range
0 °C to +80 °C
Installation
in the Ex p operating equipment
Assembly borehole
∅ 37 mm
Connection
Pressure Quick plug-in connector for hose
monitor module Flying spark barrier

3-fold
Mounting position
- any position
- plastic body inside Ex p operating
equipment
Description
Opening pressure
The pressure monitor module is a constituent part 3 mbar
of pressurised controls. Various variants are
available for applications in Zone 1, 2 and 22. Pressure monitor module Zone 2 and 22
Function
Pressure monitor module for Zone 1 Technical data
pressure monitor module
Temperature range
pickup points for measuring the flow rate
0 °C to +80 °C
Pressure monitor module for Zone 2 and 22
Installation
pressure monitor module
in the Ex pz/pD operating equipment
through-flow valve
Montagebohrung
∅ 37 mm
Dimensions Variant for Zone 1
Flying spark barrier
2-fold (1x for each input and output)
Mounting position
M36 - any position
- plastic body inside Ex pz/pD
110 mm
operating equipment
Opening pressure
57 mm
3 mbar
55 mm
Dimensions Variant for Zone 2 Order no.

Module Zone 1
Orifice plate
12 mm 17-51P3-1403
M36 15 mm 17-51P3-1503
18 mm 17-51P3-1603
Module Zone 2 or 22
80 mm
03-0330-0606-07/10-BCS-307023
17-51P3-1604
55 mm
67 mm
80
M Pressure reducer
Description
1
This upstream connecting pressure reducer is a diaphragm pressure
regulator with secondary venting for lowering the pressure of externally
supplied compressed air.
The settings are made by means of a handwheel. The set reduced pressure
can be read on a pressure gauge.
2
 Ambient conditions
Pressure reducer Ambient temperature -10 °C bis +60 °C

Medium temperature -10 °C to +40 °C
for Ex p operating equipment Zone 1 and 2 3
Pressure reducer 1/4" with pressure gauge Pressure reducer 1/2" with pressure gauge
Technical data Technical data

Operating elements
4
Operating elements
Handwheel for setting the air pressure; Handwheel for setting the air pressure;
Handwheel held in place by means of a locknut Handwheel held in place by means of a locknut
Installation Installation
Mounting position is optional, observe the flow Mounting position is optional, observe the
direction marking on the enclosure; flow direction marking on the enclosure; 5
Mounting in control cabinet borehole: ø 17.5 mm Mounting in control cabinet borehole: ø 21 mm
Max. Max.
input pressure (p1) 16 bar input pressure (p 1) 25 bar
Pressure 0.5 to 6 bar, infinitely variably Pressure 0.5 to 6 bar, infinitely variably
regulation range (p2) regulation range (p 2)
6
Connections Air connection G 1/4" Connections Air connection G 1/2"
Pressure gauge connection G 1/4" Pressure gauge connection G 1/4"
Nominal diameter DN 15 Nominal diameter DN 15
Nominal flow rate (QN) 490 l/min Nominal flow rate (QN) 2.500 l/min
Weight with pressure gauge approx. 0.55 kg Weight with pressure gauge approx. 1.2 kg
7
Material Enclosure: zinc die casting Material Enclosure: zinc die casting
Diaphragm, seals: NBR Diaphragm, seals: NBR
Compression spring: steel, galvanised Compression spring: steel, galvanised
Counterpressure spring: stainless steel Counterpressure spring: stainless steel
Scope of supply Pressure reducer, Assembly material Scope of supply Pressure reducer, Assembly material
Dimensions in mm, Pressure reducer 1/4" Dimensions in mm, Pressure reducer 1/2"
M20 x 1.5
max. 6
approx. 100
max. 6
approx. 118
72
62
84
73
G 1/2
G1/4
03-0330-0605-07/10-BCS-307022
ø 50
ø 50
32
33
34 approx. 66
54 ø 40 73
70
Order no. Pressure reducer 1/4" 05-0056-0007 Order no. Pressure reducer 1/2" 05-0056-0041
81
Customer requirements Ex p equipment
Customer BARTEC
Street Offer Order
Phone Fax Delivery
Enclosure size (mm) Application
Length Width Height Zone 1 (2G) Exterior
Zone 2 (3G) Interior

Purchase order quantity
Zone 22 (3D) Clean room
unit
Temperature class: T3 T4 T5 T6
Enclosure material/Version
Seal
Stainless steel V2A Heat insulation
6 mm/square 3 mm double bit
Stainless steel V4A Socket
7 mm/square lockable
Sheet steel Guide roll
8 mm/square
Plastic Sunscreen
Stand
Mounting strap
Inspection glass (mm) top/buttom
Width Height in front of on the side
loosely enclosed
Upper window (mm)
Width Height in front of Cable glands

Quantity Thread size Clamping range Ex i or Ex e
03-0330-0607-07/10-BCS-307024/1
Doors
single door stop position left
double door stop position right
stop position external
82
Customer requirements Ex p equipment
Operating voltage Compressed air cooling Vortex
400 V (3L/N/PE) Sheet steel Stainless steel

1
230 V (L/N/PE) 400 W 400 W
115 V (L/N/PE) 800 W 800 W
1 200 W 1 200 W
2
Built-in
Mounting plate seitlich
Foundation board verstellbar Climatisation

3
Door Height (mm) Power dissipation W
19“ frame Depth (mm) Max. inside temperature °C
Height unit Distance door (mm) Min. inside temperature °C

4
Pivoting frame Max. outdoor temperature °C
Door switch Min. outdoor temperature °C
Inside light Water cooling

5
Plan case Air cooling
Wall socket Frost protection heating
6
Attachments
Ex p control units
Ex Horn
Zone 1
Ex Flashing lamp
APEX 2003.00 APEX 2003.002x 7
Ex Lamp
APEX 2003.00S APEX 2003.002xS
Ex Switch
Zone 2
Silas
Accessories
Mounting
Ex d contactor Coil tension
right in control cabinets
11 kW AC 230 V
left discharged
15 kW AC 115 V
Flushing medium
21 kW
Compressed air Inert gas
03-0330-0607-07/10-BCS-307024/2
Documents joints Compressed air input
Wiring diagram right left
Drawing/View others
Technical description
83
Installation systems
Plug-and-socket devices for Zone 1 + 2 and for Zone 21 + 22
Plug-and-socket devices
Description
BARTEC’s plug-and-socket devices for areas in
which an explosion hazard exists are particularly Ex protection type
well-suited for use in raw atmospheres because of II 2G and D Ex de IIC T6
their high degree of IP protection and their Ex tD A21 IP 66/67 T80 °C
resistance to chemicals. Their integrated switch Certifications
function gives them the ability to switch overloads Type 07-8101-.... (DXN1)
as per IEC/EN 60947-3 Cat. AC 22 or AC 23. LCIE 99 ATEX 6027 X
Silver-plated butting contacts ensure a constant LCIE Ex 99.007 X
contact pressure with low transfer resistances. Type 07-8102-.... (DXN3)
Plugs/couplers LCIE 05 ATEX 6149
The modular design of the plug-and-socket LCIE Ex 06.002
system allows both plugs and couplers to be Type 07-8103-.... (DXN6)
supplied. They are supplied in unmounted state. LCIE 05 ATEX 6150
Wall socket LCIE Ex 06.003
BARTEC supplies both a fully certified wall so-
cket and a socket with a 30° adapter to flange Technical data
onto housings.
Protection class
Plug-and-socket devices from BARTEC are
IP 66/IP 67 (EN 60529)
approved in accordance with the European
directives not only for Zone 1 and 2, but also for Temperature range
Zone 21 and 22. Likewise for Class I Div. 2 Groups -40 °C to +40 °C
A, B, C, D and Class II Div. 2, Groups E, F, H in on request to +60 °C
accordance with the American standards.
Electrical data
Switching performance in accordance with IEC/EN 60947-3
Voltage Max. conductor cross-section in mm2 Type
440 V* Flexible Rigid Auxiliary contacts
20 A AC-23 2.5 4 07-8101
32 A AC-23 10 16 07-8102
32 A AC-23 10 16 2.5 07-8102
with auxiliary contact
60 A AC-22 16 25 07-8103
03-0330-0297/A-07/10-BCS-217102/1
60 A AC-23 16 25 2.5 07-8103

with auxiliary contact
The following plastic cable glands are available for the electrical connection:
Plug housings Type Wall socket Type

16 A M20 x 1.5 (8 to 13 mm) 07-8101-5... 16 A M25 x 1.5 07-8101-1...
32 A M25 x 1.5 (13 to 19 mm) 07-8102-5... 32 A M25 x 1.5 07-8102-1...
60 A M32 x 1.5 (17 to 25 mm) 07-8103-5... 60 A M25 x 1.5 07-8103-1...
*Further voltages on request.
86
Plug-and-socket devices for Zone 1 + 2 and for Zone 21 + 22
Plug
Dimensions plug
A B ∅ Type 1
127 51 8 to 13 07-8101-5...
128 68 13 to 19 07-8102-5...
149 83 17 to 25 07-8103-5...
3
Wall Socket
Dimensions wall socket
A B CA CAb CP D E1 E1b E2 H TA Y Z ∅ d Type
127 131 45 68 57 90 36 56 78 37.5 M25 x 1.5 180 111 4.5 07-8101-1...

138 132 84 84 73 107 70 70 70 17.5 M25 x 1.5 200 105 6.0 07-8102-1...
4
165 162 89 89 82 122 77 77 88 24.0 M25 x 1.5 236 114 6.5 07-8103-1...
Socket with 30° adapter

Dimensions socket with 30° adapter
A B CA CAb CP D D1 D2 E1 E1b E2 Y Z ∅ d Type
6
108 120 45 68 57 90 75 50 36 56 78 169 92 4.5 07-8101-3...
119 141 76 76 73 107 65 95 63 63 95 209 86 5.5 07-8102-3...
136 156 76 76 82 107 65 95 63 63 95 230 85 5.5 07-8103-3...
Selection chart
Amperage Code Execution Code Assignment Code Auxiliary Code
no. no. no. contacts no.
L + N + PE
16 A 1 Plug 51 1 without 0
(230 V)
2 + PE with two
32 A 2 Socket 12 2 1
(440 V) auxiliary contacts*
Socket with 3 + PE
60 A 3 32 3 -
30°-adapter (440 V)
03-0330-0297/A-07/10-BCS-217102/2
3 + N + PE
- - 4 -
(440 V)
Complete 07-810 -
Other socket distributors for Zone 1, 2 and Zone order no.
21, 22 available on request. Please enter code number. Auxiliary contacts* only possible for 32 A and 60 A models.
87
Enclosures and distribution boxes
Polyester, Aluminium and

Stainless steel enclosures
Polyester Aluminium High-quality stainless steel
Fields of application Chemical and Chemical and Chemical and

Petrochemical industry Petrochemical industry Petrochemical industry
OFF-SHORE OFF-SHORE OFF-SHORE
Mechanical engineering Mechanical engineering Mechanical engineering
Refineries Refineries Refineries
Food industry
Navigation
Functions Electrical distributions/controls Electrical distributions/controls Electrical distributions/controls
Sensor/actuator terminal box Sensor/actuator terminal box Sensor/actuator terminal box
Local control stations and Local control stations and bus
bus connections within the Ex area connections within the Ex area
Requirements Ex area Zone 1 and 2 Ex area Zone 1 and 2 Ex area Zone 1 and 2
International approvals International approvals International approvals
chemical-resistant chemical-resistant chemical-resistant
High protection class High protection class High protection class
03-0330-0195-07/11-BCS-201166/1
for mounted components for mounted components for mounted components

Seawater-proof Flame-retardant Seawater-proof
Flame-retardant Halogen-free, UV-resistant Flame-retardant
Halogen-free, UV-resistant Special varnishes Halogen-free, UV-resistant
High temperature resistant Suitable for installations outdoors
and in aggressive atmospheres
corrosion-proof
88
Polyester enclosures
1
Polyester enclosures
Selection chart Empty enclosure

Features
External dimensions Polyester Polyester
 Chemical-resistant in mm black, IP 66/67 grey, IP 66/67
 Temperature-resistant 3
Length (L) Width (B) Height (H) Order no. Order no.
 Flame-retardant
 Use in Ex areas with a surface 80 75 55 07-5195-0800/7555 07-5194-0800/7555
resistance < 109 Ω, black enclosure 110 75 55 07-5195-1100/7555 07-5194-1100/7555
160 75 55 07-5195-1600/7555 07-5194-1600/7555
 Corrosion-proof 07-5195-1900/7555 07-5194-1900/7555
190 75 55
 Seawater-proof 122 120 90 07-5195-1221/2090 07-5194-1221/2090
122 120 120 07-5195-1221/2012 07-5194-1221/2012
4
220 120 90 07-5195-2201/2090 07-5194-2201/2090
160 160 90 07-5195-1601/6090 07-5194-1601/6090
Description 160 160 120 07-5195-1601/6012 07-5194-1601/6012
Polyester enclosures have proven their worth in 260 160 90 07-5195-2601/6090 07-5194-2601/6090
many industrial plants. They offer safe protection 360 160 90 07-5195-3601/6090 07-5194-3601/6090
560 160 90 07-5195-5601/6090 07-5194-5601/6090
even when they are used under extremely 5
200 250 120 07-5195-2002/5012
unfavorable conditions, on exposure to aggres- 07-5195-2552/5012 07-5194-2552/5012
255 250 120
sive chemical media or hard mechanical 255 250 160 07-5195-2552/5016 07-5194-2552/5016
conditions. The inside base of the enclosure has 400 250 120 07-5195-4002/5012 07-5194-4002/5012
at its sides, threaded bushings for the fastening 400 250 160 07-5195-4002/5016 07-5194-4002/5016
of mounting rails or panels. The enclosure is 400 405 120 07-5195-4004/0512 07-5194-4004/0512
mounted by means of insulated screws outside 400 405 165 07-5195-4004/0516 07-5194-4004/0516
600 250 120 07-5195-6002/0512 07-5194-6002/5012
6
of the lid seal.
Ex enclosure black 07-5185-..../.... grey 07-5184-..../....
7
Ex protection type (EN 60079-0) II 2G Ex e II II 2G Ex e II
I M2 Ex e I
Certification PTB 08 ATEX 1062 U PTB 08 ATEX 1062 U
(further certifications on request) UL E188224 (NEMA 4X) UL E188224 (NEMA 4X)
For group 1 IBExU01ATEX1042 U
Germanischer LLoyd (Germany) 30 584-83 HH 30 584-83 HH
IECEx PTB 09.0008U PTB 09.0008U
INMETRO (Brazil) 2009EC02CP002U 2009EC02CP002U
Gost-R (Russia) POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671 POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671
RTN (Russia) PPC 00-33604 PPC 00-33604
KOSHA (Korea) 09-AV4B0-0404U 09-AV4B0-0404U
UL (USA) E188224 E188224
Technical data
Material glass-fiber reinforced polyester, EN 60079-0 glass-fiber reinforced polyester, EN 60079-0
03-0330-0196/A-07/10-BCS-B201167/1
surface resistance < 109 Ω surface resistance >1012 Ω

halogen-free halogen-free
Colour RAL 9005, black RAL 7000/RAL 7001, grey
Lid screws (other models on request) stainless steel cross-head (+ -) stainless steel cross-head (+ -)
Standard seal EPDM -20 °C to +100 °C EPDM -20 °C to +100 °C
optional Silicone -55 °C to +100 °C Silicone -55 °C to +100 °C
Mechanical resistance (EN 60079-0) impact energy 7 Nm impact energy 7 Nm
Protection class EN 60529/IEC 60529 IP 66 IP 66
89
Polyester enclosures/distribution boxes
Dimensions (mm) The dimensions indicated on this page apply to the following polyester enclosures and distribution boxes:
IP enclosure black 07-5195-..../.... Ex e distribution box black 07-5103-..../....
IP enclosure grey 07-5194-..../.... Ex e distribution box grey 07-5106-..../....
A
Ex enclosure black 07-5185-..../....
C D Ex i distribution box black 07-5105-..../....
Ex enclosure grey 07-5184-..../....
Ex i distribution box grey 07-5107-..../....
B IP distribution box black 07-5178-..../....
IP distribution box grey 07-5177-..../....
Technical data
External dimensions: 80 x 75 x 55 mm
Weight: 230 g
Material: polyester, grey, black
Article no.: 07-51 -0800/7555
Weight: 280 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1100/7555
Weight: 370 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1600/7555
Weight: 430 g
03-0330-0196/A-06/10-BCS-B201167/2
Article no.: 07-51 -1900/7555
All dimensions are approximate measurements and subject to technical changes.
90
IP enclosure black 07-5195-..../.... Ex e distribution box black 07-5103-..../.... 1
A
IP distribution box grey 07-5177-..../.... 2
Technical data
3
Weight: 660 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1221/2090 4

5
Weight: 890 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1221/2012

6
7
Weight: 1040 g
Article no.: 07-51 -2201/2090
Weight: 1280 g
03-0330-0196/A-06/10-BCS-B201167/3
Article no.: 07-51 -1601/6090
91
A
Technical data
Weight: 1500 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1601/6012

260
248 0,5 90 Weight: 1750 g
220 20 20

110
160
147
76
89
Article no.: 07-51 -2601/6090
233 73
240 80

360 0,5 90
348
20 20 Weight: 2300 g
320

147
160
110
89
76
Article no.: 07-51 -3601/6090
333 73
340 80
200
186 1 120
157,5 M6 x 6 20 25
Weight: 2320 g
ø 6.6
03-0330-0196/A-06/10-BCS-B201167/4
Material: polyester, black

100
200
250
236
178
Article no.: 07-51 -2552/5012
104
173
109
180
92
IP enclosure black 07-5195-..../.... Ex e distribution box black 07-5103-..../.... 1
A
IP distribution box grey 07-5177-..../.... 2
Technical data
External dimensions: 255 x 250 x 120 mm 3
Weight: 2730 g
Article no.: 07-51 -2552/5012

4

5
Weight: 3275 g
Article no.: 07-51 -2552/5016

6
External dimensions: 400 x 250 x 120 mm 7

Weight: 3650 g

200
Article no.: 07-51 -4002/5012
380
Weight: 4800 g

03-0330-0196/A-06/10-BCS-201167/5
Article no.: 07-51 -4002/5016
93
A
Technical data
Weight: 5380 g
Article no.: 07-51 -6002/5012
Weight: 5080 g
Article no.: 07-51 -4004/0512
Weight: 7740 g
Article no.: 07-51 -4004/0516

03-0330-0196/A-06/10-BCS-201167/6
94
Polyester distribution boxes for Zone 1 and Zone 21
Polyester distribution boxes 4
Description
5
Polyester distribution boxes have been of great Option
advantage in many industrial plants. They offer External feet of high-quality stainless steel
safe protection even when they are exposed to ex-
Components
treme environmental conditions, aggressive
Rail-mounted terminals, terminal markers, cable
chemical media or high mechanical stress.
glands, mounting panels, rails, type labels, labels
The narrow sides within the enclosure hold 6
Installation instructions
threaded bushings for the fixing of terminal rails
The installer must make sure that the enclosure
or mounting panels. The enclosure is mounted
used is suitable for the corresponding field of
by means of insulated screws outside of the lid
application. This means that the marking must
sealing gasket.
correspond to the classification of the Ex area.
These black high-quality explosion-proofed Also must the temperature class of the distribution
enclosures are used in hazardous areas by box meet the respective requirements. 7
inflammable dust (Zone 21 and 22).The
fundamental prerequisites of the “protection
through enclosure“ protection class are fulfilled
with the heating up calculation as per the
accompanying sheet and a separate IP protection
test. EC model test certification was issued in
2000 by the nominated body IBExU.
03-0330-0197/A-10/10-BCS-201168/1
95
IP distribution box 07-5178-..../.... 07-5177-..../....
black
Ex e distribution box 07-5103-..../.... 07-5106-..../....
grey
Ex i distribution box 07-5105-..../.... 07-5107-..../....
Ex protection type II 2G Ex e II T6 resp. T5 II 2G Ex e II T6 resp. T5
(according to EN 60079-0) II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 resp. T5 II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 resp. T5
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP6x T 80 °C
Ambient temperature ranges -20 °C (-55 °C) to +40 °C at T6 -20 °C (-55 °C) to +40 °C at T6
(special temperature ranges on request) -20 °C (-55 °C) to +55 °C at T5 -20 °C (-55 °C) to +55 °C at T5
Certification
For Zone 1 and 2 PTB 08 ATEX 1064 PTB 08 ATEX 1064
For Zone 21 and 22 IBExU00ATEX1081 IBExU00ATEX1082
(further certifications on request)
Germanischer LLoyd (Germany) 30 584-83 HH 30 584-83 HH
IECEx PTB 09.0009X PTB 09.0009X
INMETRO (Brazil) 2009EC02CP003 2009EC02CP003
Gost-R (Russia) POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671 POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671
RTN (Russia) PPC 00-33604 PPC 00-33604
KOSHA (Korea) 09-AV4B0-0403X 09-AV4B0-0403X
NEPSI (China) GYJ05305 GYJ05305
Technical data
Material glass-fibre reinforced polyester, EN 60079-0 glass-fibre reinforced polyester, EN 60079-0
surface resistance < 109 Ω surface resistance > 1012 Ω
halogen-free halogen-free
Colour RAL 9005, black RAL 7000/RAL 7001, grey
Lid screws stainless steel, captive stainless steel, captive
(other models on request) cross-head (+ -) cross-head (+ -)
Standard seals EPDM -20° C to +100° C EPDM -20° C to +100° C
optional silicone -55° C to +100° C silicone -55° C to +100° C
Mechanical resistance impact energy 7 Nm impact energy 7 Nm
according to EN 60079-0
Protection class EN 60529/IEC 60529 IP 66 IP 66
Rated voltage max. 1 100 V max. 1 100 V
03-0330-0197/A-10/10-BCS-201168/2
96
Polyester distribution boxes
The table on this page applies to the following polyester distribution boxes:
IP distribution box black 07-5178-..../.... Ex e distribution box black 07-5103-..../.... Ex i distribution box black 07-5105-..../....
IP distribution box grey 07-5177-..../.... Ex e distribution box grey 07-5106-..../.... Ex i distribution box grey 07-5107-..../.... 1
Rail-mounted terminal components/maximum number Polyester distribution boxes
Article no. Mini-terminal AKZ4 WDU 2.5 WDU 2.5 bl WDU 4 2

Polyester distribution boxes 07-7902-.... 03-7112-0006 03-7111-0012 03-7111-0012 03-7112-0015
mounting Terminals mounting Terminals mounting Terminals mounting Terminals mounting Terminals
rail per rail rail per rail rail per rail rail per rail rail per rail
07- -0800/7555 1 6 1 8 - - - - - -
3
07- -1100/7555 1 8 1 13 - - - - - -
07- -1600/7555 1 12 1 21 - - - - - -
4
07- -1900/7555 1 16 1 26 - - - - - -
07- -2300/7550 1 19 1 32 - - - - - -
07- -1221/2090 2 8 1 14 - - 1 16 - - 5
07- -1221/2012 2 8 1 14 - - 1 16 - -
07- -2201/2090 2 17 1 30 - - 1 35 - -
6
07- -1601/6090 - - 2 18 1 24 1 23 1 20
07- -1601/6012 - - 2 18 1 24 1 23 1 20
07- -2601/6090 - - 2 34 1 43 1 42 1 34 7
07- -3601/6090 - - - - 1 60 1 62 1 50
07- -2552/5012 - - - - 2 43 3 42 2 35
07- -2552/5016 - - - - 2 43 3 42 2 35
07- -4002/5012 - - - - 2 67 3 70 2 56
07- -4002/5016 - - - - 2 67 3 70 2 56
07- -4004/0512 - - - - 3 67 5 70 3 56
03-0330-0197-08/08-BCS-201168/3
07- -4004/0516 - - - - 3 67 5 70 3 56
07- -6002/5012 - - - - 2 108 2 110 1 91
97
IP distribution box grey 07-5177-..../.... Ex e distribution box grey 07-5106-..../.... Ex i distribution box grey 07-5107-..../....
Cable glands/maximum number C D Polyester distribution boxes

B
Article no.
Polyester distribution boxes Side M12 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5
extended extended
07- -0800/7555 A/B 4 2 2 2 1 1 - - - -

C/D 1 1 - - - - - - - -
07- -1100/7555 A/B 6 4 3 3 2 2 - - - -

C/D 1 1 - - - - - - - -
07- -1600/7555 A/B 12 6 5 4 4 3 - - - -

C/D 1 1 - - - - - - - -
07- -1900/7555 A/B 15 8 6 5 5 4 - - - -

C/D 1 1 - - - - - - - -
07- -1221/2090 A/B 13 9 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 -

C/D 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 - -
07- -1221/2012 A/B 13 9 5 5 4 3 2 1 1 -

C/D 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 - -
07- -2201/2090 A/B 28 18 12 11 10 5 3 3 2 -

C/D 4 4 2 2 2 1 1 1 - -
07- -1601/6090 A/B 18 14 8 8 6 4 2 2 1 -

C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 2 1 - -
07- -1601/6012 A/B 18 14 8 8 6 4 2 1 1 -

C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 2 1 - -
07- -2601/6090 A/B 33 26 17 14 12 7 4 3 3 -

C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 2 1 - -
07- -3601/6090 A/B 48 38 24 20 18 10 6 5 4 -

C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 2 1 - -
07- -2552/5012 A/B 53 34 23 20 18 9 7 4 3 2

C/D 12 12 10 8 8 4 3 2 2 2
07- -2552/5016 A/B 53 34 23 20 18 9 7 4 3 2

C/D 12 12 10 8 8 4 3 2 2 2
07- -4002/5012 A/B 88 58 38 35 30 17 13 6 5 4

C/D 12 12 10 8 8 4 3 2 2 2
07- -4002/5016 A/B 88 58 38 35 30 17 13 6 5 4

C/D 12 12 10 8 8 4 3 2 2 2
07- -4004/0512 A/B 88 58 38 35 30 17 13 6 5 4

C/D 26 20 16 14 10 6 4 2 4 3
07- -4004/0516 A/B 135 89 58 53 46 26 20 9 7 4

03-0330-0197-08/08-BCS-201168/4
C/D 42 38 34 30 24 8 5 3 6 4
07- -6002/5012 A/B 130 84 56 52 46 24 18 10 6 4

C/D 12 12 10 8 8 4 3 2 2 2
Each enclosure side wall has only a limited number of gland entries to ensure the mechanical stability of the enclosure.
98
IP distribution box grey 07-5177-..../.... Ex e distribution box grey 07-5106-..../.... Ex i distribution box grey 07-5107-..../.... 1
External dimensions, earth bars, mounting panels Polyester distribution boxes
Article no. External dimensions in mm Earth bars Mounting panel 2
Polyester enclosure Length Width Height Type Order no. Type Order no. Order no.
07- -0800/7555 80 75 55 MK 2 05-0012-0006 - - 05-2105-0002

3
07- -1100/7555 110 75 55 MK 2 05-0012-0006 - - 05-2105-0003
07- -1600/7555 160 75 55 MK 2 05-0012-0006 - - 05-2105-0004
07- -1900/7555 190 75 55 MK 2 05-0012-0006 - - 05-2105-0005

4
07- -1221/2090 122 120 90 QS 3 05-0012-0091 LS 4 05-0012-0100 05-0105-0100
07- -1221/2012 122 120 120 QS 3 05-0012-0091 LS 4 05-0012-0100 05-0105-0100

5
07- -2201/2090 220 120 90 QS 3 05-0012-0091 LS 9 05-0012-0101 05-0105-0101
07- -1601/6090 160 160 90 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 5 05-0012-0010 05-0105-0103
6
07- -1601/6012 160 160 120 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 5 05-0012-0010 05-0105-0103
07- -2601/6090 260 160 90 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 11 05-0012-0102 05-0105-0104
07- -3601/6090 360 160 90 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 16 05-0012-0103 05-0105-0105

7
07- -2552/5012 255 250 120 QS 9 05-0012-0096 LS 11 05-0012-0105 05-0105-0113
07- -2552/5016 255 250 160 QS 9 05-0012-0096 LS 11 05-0012-0105 05-0105-0113
07- -4002/5012 400 250 120 QS 9 05-0012-0096 LS 18 05-0012-0016 05-0105-0114
07- -4002/5016 400 250 160 QS 9 05-0012-0096 LS 18 05-0012-0016 05-0105-0114
07- -4004/0512 400 405 120 QS 15 05-0012-0097 LS 18 05-0012-0016 05-0105-0117
07- -4004/0516 400 405 160 QS 15 05-0012-0097 LS 18 05-0012-0016 05-0105-0117
07- -6002/5012 600 250 120 QS 9 05-0012-0096 LS 28 05-0012-0106 05-0105-0199

03-0330-0197-08/08-BCS-201168/5
99

Polyester distribution boxes have been of great
Ex protection type
advantage in many industrial plants. They offer
II 2G Ex e II T6, T5
safe protection even when they are exposed to
II 2G Ex e ia IIC T6, T5
extreme environmental conditions, aggressive
chemical media or high mechanical stress.
Certification
The narrow sides within the enclosure hold
PTB 08 ATEX 1064
threaded bushings for the fixing of terminal rails
IBExU00ATEX1081
or mounting panels. The enclosure is mounted
IECEx PTB 09.0009X
by means of insulated screws outside of the lid
sealing gasket. optional:
NEPSI GYJ05305
These black high-quality explosion-proofed
RTN PPC 00-21001
enclosures are used in hazardous areas by
GOST-R POCC SI.ME92.B01671
inflammable dust (Zone 21 and 22). The
PPC No. 3377.06.30-31.62.4
fundamental prerequisites of the „protection
through enclosure“ protection class are fulfilled Ambient temperature
with the heating up calculation as per the -20 °C up to +40 °C at T6
accompanying sheet and a separate IP protection -20 °C up to +55 °C at T5
test.
optional:
-55 °C up to +40 °C at T6
-55 °C up to +55 °C at T5
Technical data
Protection class
IP 65
Material
glass-fibre reinforced polyester,
EN 60079-0, halogen-free
03-0330-0592-09/10-BCS-304855/1
colour: RAL 9005, black

Electrical resistance
surface resistance < 10 9 Ω
100
Selection chart
A
Dimensions Cable glands C D Terminals Order no. 1
B
side A side B side C side D
110 x 75 mm 2 x M20 x 1.5 2 x M20 x 1.5 - - 10 x AKZ4 + 2 x PE 07-5103-9600

1 x M20 x 1.5*
2
110 x 75 mm 1 x M20 x 1.5 2 x M20 x 1.5 - - 10 x AKZ4 + 2 x PE 07-5103-9601
1 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M20*
122 x 120 mm 2 x M20 x 1.5 2 x M20 x 1.5 1 x M20 x 1.5* 1 x M20 x 1.5* 10 x WDU4 + 2 x PE 07-5103-9602
160 x 160 mm 2 x M25 x 1.5 2 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M20 x 1.5* 1 x M20 x 1.5* 12 x WDU4 + 4 x PE 07-5103-9603 3
220 x 120 mm 4 x M16 x 1.5 4 x M16 x 1.5 - - 25 x WDU4 + 6 x PE 07-5103-9604
4 x M20 x 1.5* 4 x M20 x 1.5
1 x M25 x 1.5*
260 x 160 mm 3 x M25 x 1,5 2 x M32 x 1.5 - - 14 x WDU6 + 4 x PE 07-5103-9605

3 x M20 x 1.5 3 x M25 x 1.5 4 x WDU2.5 + 2 x PE 4
1 x M20 x 1.5
122 x 120 mm - 2 x M20 x 1.5 1 x M20 x 1.5 1 x M20 x 1.5 8 x WDU4 + 2 x PE 07-5103-9606
122 x 120 mm - 2 x M20 x 1.5 1 x M20 x 1.5* 1 x M20 x 1.5* 8 x WDU4 + 2 x PE 07-5103-9607
5
122 x 120 mm - 2 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M25 x 1.5 6 x WDU6 + 2 x PE 07-5103-9608
122 x 120 mm - 2 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M25 x 1.5* 1 x M25 x 1.5* 6 x WDU6 + 2 x PE 07-5103-9609
* Sealing plug
6
Dimensions 110 x 75 x 55 mm Type 07-5103-9600 Dimensions 110 x 75 x 55 mm Type 07-5103-9601
Terminals 10 x AKZ4 + 2AKE4 Terminals 10 x AKZ4 + 2AKE4
7
110 110
M25 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5

2 x M20 x 1,5
75
75
2 x M20 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5

2 x M20 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5
03-0330-0592-09/10-BCS-304855/2
101
Terminals 10 x WDU4 + 2 x WPE4 Terminals 12 x WDU4 + 4 x WPE4
122 160
M25 x 1,5 M25 x 1,5

2 x M20 x 1,5
120
160
M20 x 1,5 2 x M20 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5
2 x M25 x 1,5
Terminals 25 x WDU4 + 6 x WPE4 Terminals 14 x WDU6 + 4 x WPE6
4 x WDU2,5 + 2 x WPE2,5
260
220 3 x M25 x 1,5 3 x M20 x 1,5
4 x M16 x 1,5 4 x M20 x 1,5
6 mm 2 2,5 mm 2
120
160
M25 x 1,5 4 x M16 x 1,5 4 x M20 x 1,5
2 x M32 x 1,5 3 x M25 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5

03-0330-0592-09/10-BCS-304855/3
102
Terminals 8 x WDU4 + 2 x WPE4 Terminals 8 x WDU4 +2 x WPE4
1
122
122
2
PE PE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
M20 x 1,5 PE PE M20 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5 M20 x 1,5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
120
120
3
BARTEC VARNOST
0102
SI-1410 Zagorje ob Savi
BARTEC VARNOST Typ 07-5103-9607 IP65

0102
SI-1410 Zagorje ob Savi II 2G Ex e II T6 PTB 08 ATEX 1064
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 6X T80°C IBExU 00 ATEX 1081

Typ 07-5103-9606 IP65
4 mm 2
II 2G Ex e II T6 PTB 08 ATEX 1064

F. Nr.:SI * * * / * * U 690V N
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 6X T80°C IBExU 00 ATEX 1081
4 mm 2
F. Nr.:SI * * * / * * U 690V N
2 x M20 x 1,5 2 x M20 x 1,5 4
Terminals 6 x WDU6 + 2 x WPE4 Terminals 6 x WDU6 + 2 x WPE4 5
122 122
6
M25 x 1,5 PE PE
M25 x 1,5 M25 x 1,5 PE PE
M25 x 1,5
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
120
120
7
BARTEC VARNOST BARTEC VARNOST
0102 0102
SI-1410 Zagorje ob Savi SI-1410 Zagorje ob Savi
Typ 07-5103-9608 IP65 Typ 07-5103-9609 IP65

II 2G Ex e II T6 PTB 08 ATEX 1064 II 2G Ex e II T6 PTB 08 ATEX 1064
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 6X T80°C IBExU 00 ATEX 1081 II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 6X T80°C IBExU 00 ATEX 1081
6 mm 2 6 mm 2
F. Nr.:SI * * * / * * U 550V N F. Nr.:SI * * * / * * U 550V N
2 x M25 x 1,5 2 x M25 x 1,5

03-0330-0592-09/10-BCS-304855/4
103
Polyester cabinets/-distribution boxes with door
Polyester cabinets-/distribution boxes

with door
Empty Ex-enclosure 07-5187-..../....
black
Ex e distribution box 07-5109-..../....
Ex i distribution box 07-5110-..../....
Ex protection type II 2G Ex e II T6 or T5
(according to EN 60079-0) II 2G Ex [ia/ib] IIC T6 or T5
Ambient temperature
(special temperature range on request) -20 °C to +40 °C
Certification Distribution box: PTB 08 ATEX 1066
(further certifications on request) POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671
Description RTN PPC 00-33604
BARTEC offers nine different types of polyester
enclosures with door as distribution boxes
for Ex e. The enclosures safely protect against Technical data
mechanical stress and resist even the most ex-
treme environmental conditions. Material glass-fibre reinforced polyester
enclosure with hinged door, EN 50014
Accessories surface resistance < 109 Ω,
Supplied with steel sheet mounting panel steel sheet mounting panel, RAL 2000
Components Colour RAL 9005, black
Rail-mounted terminals, terminal markers, cable
glands, mounting panels, rails, labels Door lock double way cam lock
(other models on request)
Standard seals foamed PU seal
Installation instructions -20 °C to +80 °C
used is suitable for the corresponding field of Mechanical resistance impact energy 7 Nm
application. This means that the marking must (according to EN 50014)
correspond to the classification of the Ex area. Protection class EN 60529/IEC 60529 IP 66
Also must the temperature class of the distribution EN 60079-0 (07-5187-8000/0130 in IP 56)
box meet the respective requirements.
Selection chart
External dimensions in mm Empty Ex enclosure Ex e distribution box Ex i distribution box
Length (L) Width (B) Height (H) Order no. Order no. Order no.
200 300 150 07-5187-2003/0015 07-5109-2003/0015 07-5110-2003/0015

250 350 150 07-5187-2503/5015 07-5109-2503/5015 07-5110-2503/5015
300 400 200 07-5187-3004/0020 07-5109-3004/0020 07-5110-3004/0020
03-0330-0198-02/10-BCS-B201169/1E
400 400 200 07-5187-4004/0020 07-5109-4004/0020 07-5110-4004/0020

400 600 200 07-5187-4006/0020 07-5109-4006/0020 07-5110-4006/0020
600 600 200 07-5187-6006/0020 07-5109-6006/0020 07-5110-6006/0020
500 500 300 07-5187-5005/0030 07-5109-5005/0030 07-5110-5005/0030
600 800 300 07-5187-6008/0030 07-5109-6008/0030 07-5110-6008/0030
800 1000 300 07-5187-8000/0130 07-5109-8000/0130 07-5110-8000/0130
104
Polyester enclosures/distribution boxes with door
Dimensions 50
38.5
25
∅ 8.5
30 T 1
(25)
9
2
h1
H
25
3
b2
b1 t1
B
Selection chart Polyester enclosure with door 4

Dimensions in mm Order no.
Width (B) Height (H) Depth (T) b1 h1 t1 b2 Weight in kg
200 300 150 140 256 130 100 3.7 07-5187-20030015

250 350 150 190 306 130 150 4.6 07-5187-25035015
300 400 200 240 355 180 200 6.0 07-5187-30040020 5
400 400 200 340 354 180 300 6.5 07-5187-40040020
400 600 200 340 554 180 300 11.5 07-5187-40060020
500 500 300 440 454 280 400 12.9 07-5187-50050030
600 600 200 540 554 180 500 15.9 07-5187-60060020
600 800 300 485 753 280 500 24.3 07-5187-60080030
800 1000 300 685 953 280 700 30.0 07-5187-80000130 6
Cable glands/maximum number The following table applies to polyester enclosures/distribution boxes with door
A Empty Ex enclosure black 07-5187-..../....
C D Ex e distribution boxes black 07-5109-..../....
B Ex i distribution boxes black 07-5110-..../.... 7
Article no. Side M12 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5
07- -2003/0015 A/B 24 18 12 8 8 2 2 2 2 -

C/D 24 18 6 4 4 2 - - - -
07- -2503/5015 A/B 32 24 18 12 12 4 2 2 2 -
C/D 32 24 12 8 8 2 2 2 2 -
07- -3004/0020 A/B 60 50 32 32 24 12 8 4 4 2
C/D 60 50 24 24 24 12 4 4 4 2
07- -4004/0020 A/B 96 70 48 40 40 24 12 8 8 4
C/D 60 50 24 24 24 12 4 4 4 2
07- -4006/0020 A/B 96 70 48 40 40 24 12 8 8 4
C/D 120 90 56 52 44 24 12 10 10 4
07- -6006/0020 A/B 156 110 80 72 64 36 20 16 16 6
C/D 120 90 56 52 44 24 12 10 10 4
03-0330-0198-02/10-BCS-B201169/2E
07- -5005/0030 A/B 220 162 128 112 98 50 36 18 18 12

C/D 165 126 80 72 63 30 16 12 12 9
07- -6008/0030 A/B 286 198 160 144 112 60 40 24 24 18
C/D 308 234 168 152 112 60 36 21 21 21
07- -8000/0130 A/B 308 234 160 144 112 60 40 24 24 18
C/D 418 306 216 200 154 90 52 33 33 27
105
Terminal box
Description
The explosion-proof terminal boxes of glass-fi- The terminal box is also suitable for the connec-
ber reinforced plastic come with pillar terminals. tion of intrinsically safe circuits. Such cases re-
quire special markings. The box is mounted via
Lid and base are secured with captive screws. The
fixing holes located outside of the terminal com-
box has pillar terminals and threads (see selec-
partment.
tion chart). All holes for cable entries not used,
have to be sealed by means of Ex-certified stop-
ping plugs.
Dimensions (in mm)

45,5
17,5 74,5
2
Terminal box
94,5
74,5
62
Fields of application
4,5
 Connection of lamps, devices and sensors
 Zone 1/Zone 2
9,5 12
Explosion protection 26,5
Ex protection type 62 2
EN 60079-0
II 2G Ex e II T6
Certification Selection chart accessories/spare parts
PTB 08 ATEX 1061
Cable glands Stopping plugs
Germanischer LLoyd 30 584-83 HH
IECEx PTB 09.0066x M20 x 1.5 03-6062-0127 (6-13 mm) 03-5210-0064
Gost-R (Russia) POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671 M20 x 1.5 07-9534-2M2 (5-9 mm) -
RTN (Russia) PPC 00-33604
Ambient temperature M20 x 1.5 07-9534-3M2 (10-14 mm) -
-20 °C to +40 °C
Terminal boxes Ex e, 690 V (just drilling, without KVS)
Technical data
Name Order no.
Material
glass-fibre reinforced polyester, 4 sheath clamps 2 x 4 mm², 1 x M20 x 1.5 + 2 x M20 x 1.5 07-5311-2320/DD00
colour: RAL 7035 2
5 sheath clamps 2 x 4 mm , 1 x M20 x 1.5 + 2 x M20 x 1.5 07-5311-2420/DD00
Lid screws
stainless steel, captive,
cross-head, M 4 Terminal boxes Ex e, 690 V (with metric polyamide cable glands)
Seals Name Order no.

EPDM -20 °C to +80 °C 4 sheath clamps 2 x 4 mm² 07-5311-9014
Mechanical resistance 1 x M20 x 1.5 (6 to 12), 2 x M20 x 1.5 (5 to 9) Ex e
according to EN 60079-0 3 x M20 x 1.5 (6 to 12) Ex e 07-5311-2320/FF00
impact energy 7 Nm 1 x M20 x 1.5 (10 to 14), 2 x M20 x 1.5 (6 to 12) Ex e 07-5311-9016
Protection class 5 sheath clamps 2 x 4 mm2 07-5311-9015
IP 65 (EN 60529/IEC 60529) 1 x M20 x 1.5 (6 to 12), 2 x M20 x 1.5 (5 to 9) Ex e
03-0330-0199/A-10/10-BCS-201170/3
3 x M20 x 1.5 (6 to 12) Ex e 07-5311-2420/FFOO

Terminals
4 or 5 Ex e II 1 x M20 x 1.5 (10 to 14), 2 x M20 x 1.5 (6 to 12) Ex e 07-5311-9017
pillar terminals according to execution
max. 2 x 4 mm2, single-wire Terminal boxes Ex i (with metric polyamide cable glands)
Rated voltage Name Order no.

max. 690 V
4 sheath clamps 2 x 4 mm², 3 x M20 x 1.5 (6 bis 12) Ex i 07-5311-9009
Rated current
max. 27 A 5 sheath clamps 2 x 4 mm2, 3 x M20 x 1.5 (6 bis 12) Ex i 07-5311-9010
106
Aluminium enclosures
Selection chart IP enclosure
External dimensions Aluminium 1

in mm grey, IP 66
Length Width Height Order no.
58 64 36 07-5190-0580/6436
98 64 36 07-5190-0980/6436 2
150 64 36 07-5190-1500/6436
75 80 57 07-5190-0750/8057
Aluminium enclosures 125
175
80
80
57
57
07-5190-1250/8057
07-5190-1750/8057
250 80 57 07-5190-2500/8057
122 120 80 07-5190-1221/2080 3
122 120 90 07-5190-1221/2090
360 120 80 07-5190-3601/2080
220 120 80 07-5190-2201/2080
Features 220 120 90 07-5190-2201/2090
 Temperature-resistant 160 160 90 07-5190-1601/6090
260 160 90 07-5190-2601/6090 4
 Chemical-resistant against acetone and 360 160 90 07-5190-3601/6090
ammoniac; against benzene, benzole,
560 160 90 07-5190-5601/6090
heating oil
200 230 110 07-5190-2002/3011
 Seawater-resistant with special varnishing 280 230 110 07-5190-2802/3011
and priming on request 330 230 110 07-5190-3302/3011
400 230 110 07-5190-4002/3011 5
600 230 110 07-5190-6002/3011
Description 400 310 110 07-5190-4003/3011
600 310 110 07-5190-6003/3011
Aluminium enclosures have proven to be an
200 230 180 07-5190-2002/3018
excellent solution for encapsulating and shielding
330 230 180 07-5190-3302/3018
components and modules in electronic and
400 310 180 07-5190-4003/1018 6
pneumatic engineering. The base and lid of the
600 310 180 07-5190-6003/1018
enclosure come with earthing screws for the
connection of the protective conductor. Fixing
holes outside the sealed space.
Ex enclosure grey 07-5180-..../.... 7
Ex protection type (EN 60079-0) II 2G Ex e II
Certification PTB 08 ATEX 1063 U
Germanischer LLoyd (Germany) 30 584-83HH
Gost-R (Russia) POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671
Technical data
Material aluminium, die or shell casting, (metal mould)
ALSi 12, Mg < 6 thread -%
Colour RAL 7001, silver grey
special varnish and seawater-resistant
03-0330-0202/A-02/10-BCS-201173/1
varnish on request
Lid screws stainless steel, captive,
(other models on request) cross-head (+ -)
Standard seals CR -20 °C to +80 °C
optional silicone -55 °C to +100 °C
Mechanical resistance nach EN 60079-0 impact energy 7 Nm
Protection class EN 60529/IEC 60529 IP 66
107
Aluminium enclosures/distribution boxes
Dimensions (mm) The dimensions on this page apply to the following aluminium enclosure/distribution boxes:
IP enclosure 07-5190-..../.... IP distribution box 07-5172-..../....

A
Ex enclosure 07-5180-..../.... Ex e distribution box 07-5101-..../....
C D
B
Technical data
Weight: 150 g
Material: aluminium, grey
Article no.: 07-51 -0580/6436
Weight: 250 g
Article no.: 07-51 -0980/6436
Weight: 320 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1500/6436
Weight: 300 g

03-0330-0202/A-02/10-BCS-201173/2
Article no.: 07-51 -0750/8057

108
Aluminium enclosure/distribution boxes
IP enclosure 07-5190-..../.... IP distribution box 07-5172-..../.... 1

A
C D
B
2
Technical data

3
Weight: 440 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1250/8057

4
Weight: 510 g
5
Article no.: 07-51 -1750/8057

7
Weight: 940 g
Article no.: 07-51 -1221/2080
Weight: 880 g

03-0330-0202-08/08-BCS-201173/3
Article no.: 07-51 -1221/2090
Alle Maße sind ca.-Maße. Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.

109
Aluminium enclosure/distribution boxes

A
C D
B
Technical data
Weight: 1390 g
Article no.: 07-51 -2201/2080
Weight: 1350 g
Article no.: 07-51 -2201/2090
Weight: 1950 g
Article no.: 07-51 -3601/2080
Weight: 1470 g

03-0330-0202-08/08-BCS-201173/4
Article no.: 07-51 -1601/6090
All dimensions are approximate measurements and subject to terminal changes.
110

A
C D
B
2
Technical data
Weight: 2100 g 3
Article no.: 07-51 -2601/6090
Weight: 2700 g
5
Article no.: 07-51 -3601/6090
Weight: 3600 g 7
Article no.: 07-51 -5601/6090
Weight: 2450 g

03-0330-0202-08/08-BCS-201173/5
Article no.: 07-51 -2002/3011
111

A
C D
B
Technical data
Weight: 2990 g
Article no.: 07-51 -2802/3011
Weight: 3400 g
Article no.: 07-51 -3302/3011
Weight: 4600 g
Article no.: 07-51 -4002/3011
Weight: 6800 g

03-0330-0202-08/08-BCS-201173/6
Article no.: 07-51 -6002/3011
112

A
C D
B
2
Technical data
Weight: 6600 g
3
Article no.: 07-51 -4003/1011
Weight: 9400 g
5
Article no.: 07-51 -6003/1011
Aluminium enclosure for NPT thread on request (insulation thickness). All dimensions are approximate measurements and subject to terminal changes.
7
03-0330-0202-08/08-BCS-201173/7
113
Aluminium distribution boxes for Zone 1 and Zone 21
Description
Aluminium distribution boxes have proven to be
an excellent solution for encapsulating and
shielding components and modules in electronic
and pneumatic engineering. Bottom and lid of the
distribution boxes come with earthing screws for
the connecting of the protective conductor.
Mounting threads in the bottom section, fixing
holes outside of the sealed space.
The same high quality explosion-proofed
enclosures are used in hazardous areas by inflam-
mable dust (Zone 21 and 22). By means of the
heating calculation according to the supplement
to the test certificate and a separate IP-protection
test, the basic requirements of the “protection
through enclosure“ type of protection are met.
Aluminium Installation instructions

distribution boxes used is suitable for the corresponding field of
application. This means that the marking must
correspond to the classification of the Ex area.
Also must the temperature class of the distribution
box meet the respective requirements.
IP distribution box 07-5172-..../....

Ex e distribution box 07-5101-..../....
grey
Ex protection type II 2G Ex e II T6 resp. T5
II 2G Ex ia IIC T6 resp. T5
Ambient temperature range -55 °C to +40 °C at T6
(special temperature range on request) -55 °C to +55 °C at T5
Certification PTB 08 ATEX 1065
for Zone 21 and Zone 22 IBExU00ATEX1080
(further certifications on request)
Germanischer LLoyd (Germany) 30 584-83 HH
Gost-R (Russia) POCC SI.ME 92.BO1671
NEPSI (China) GYJ05305
Technical data
Material aluminium, die or shell casting,
AISi 12, Mg < 6 thread -%
Colour/coating RAL 7001, silver grey
special varnish and seawater-resistant
varnish on request
Lid screws stainless steel, captive,
03-0330-0203/A-02/10-BCS-201174/1
(other models on request) cross-head (+ -)

Standard seals CR -20 °C to +80 °C
optional silicone -55 °C to +100 °C
Mechanical resistance impact energy 7 Nm
(according to EN 60079-0)
Protection class EN 60529/IEC 60529 IP 66
Rated voltage max. 1 100 V
114
Aluminium distribution boxes
Aluminum distribution boxes The table on this page applies to the IP distribution box 07-5172-..../....
following aluminium distribution boxes: Ex e distribution box 07-5101-..../....
Ex i distribution box 07-5102-..../.... 1
Rail-mounted terminals/maximum number
Article no. Mini-terminal AKZ4 WDU 2.5 WDU 2.5 bl WDU 4

Aluminium enclosure 07-7902-.... 03-7112-0008 03-7111-0012 03-7111-0012 03-7112-0015
mounting Terminals mounting Terminals mounting Terminals mounting Terminals mounting Terminals
rail per rail rail per rail rail per rail rail per rail rail per rail 2
07- -0580/6436 - 3 - - - - - - - -
07- -0980/6436 - 7 - - - - - - - -
3
07- -1500/6436 - 11 - - - - - - - -
07- -0750/8057 1 5 1 7 - - - - - -
07- -1250/8057 1 10 1 16 - - - - - - 4
07- -1750/8057 1 14 1 22 - - - - - -
07- -1221/2080 2 8 1 14 - - 1 16 - -
5
07- -1221/2090 2 8 1 14 - - 1 16 - -
07- -2201/2080 2 17 1 30 - - 1 35 - -
07- -2201/2090 2 17 1 30 - - 1 35 - - 6
07- -3601/2080 - - - - 1 60 1 60 1 49
07- -1601/6090 - - 2 18 1 24 1 23 1 20
7
07- -2601/6090 - - 2 34 1 43 1 42 1 34
07- -3601/6090 - - - - 1 60 1 62 1 50
07- -5601/6090 - - - - 1 98 1 102 1 85
07- -2002/3011 - - 3 25 2 30 3 30 2 25
07- -2802/3011 - - - - 2 44 3 44 2 38
07- -3302/3011 - - - - 2 56 3 53 2 46
07- -4002/3011 - - - - 2 70 3 68 2 58
03-0330-0203-08/08-BCS-201174/2
07- -6002/3011 - - - - 2 108 2 109 1 90
07- -4003/1011 - - - - 3 70 4 68 2 58
07- -6003/1011 - - - - 2 110 3 110 2 91
115
Aluminium distribution boxes
Aluminum distribution boxes The table on this page applies to the IP distribution box 07-5172-..../....
following aluminium distribution boxes: Ex e distribution box 07-5101-..../....
External dimensions, earth bars, mounting plates
Article no. External dimensions in mm Earth bars/Mantle terminal Mounting panel

Aluminium-Gehäuse
Length Width Height Type Order no. Type Order no. Order no.
07- -0580/6436 58 64 36 SB 2 05-0012-0002 - - 05-2105-0094
07- -0980/6436 98 64 36 SB 2 05-0012-0002 - - 05-2105-0095
07- -1500/6436 150 64 36 SB 2 05-0012-0002 - - 05-2105-0096
07- -0750/8057 75 80 57 SB 2 05-0012-0002 - - 05-2105-0097
07- -1250/8057 125 80 57 SB 2 05-0012-0002 - - 05-0105-0098
07- -1750/8057 175 80 57 SB 2 05-0012-0002 LS 4 - 05-0105-0099
07- -1221/2080 122 120 80 QS 3 05-0012-0002 LS 4 05-0012-0100 05-0105-0100
07- -1221/2090 122 120 90 QS 3 05-0012-0002 LS 9 05-0012-0100 05-0105-0100
07- -2201/2080 220 120 80 QS 3 05-0012-0091 LS 5 05-0012-0101 05-0105-0101
07- -2201/2090 220 120 90 QS 3 05-0012-0091 LS 5 05-0012-0101 05-0105-0101
07- -3601/2080 360 120 80 QS 3 05-0012-0091 LS 11 05-0012-0103 05-0105-0102
07- -1601/6090 160 160 90 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 16 05-0012-0010 05-0105-0103
07- -2601/6090 260 160 90 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 11 05-0012-0012 05-0105-0106
07- -3601/6090 360 160 90 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 11 05-0012-0014 05-0105-0105
07- -5601/6090 560 160 90 QS 5 05-0012-0092 LS 18 05-0012-0107 05-0105-0107
07- -2002/3011
200 230 110 QS 7 05-0012-0098 LS 18 05-0012-0108 05-0105-0108
07- -2002/3018
07- -2802/3011 280 230 110 QS 7 05-0012-0098 LS 18 05-0012-0109 05-0105-0109
07- -3302/3011
330 230 110 QS 7 05-0012-0098 LS 18 05-0012-0110 05-0105-0110
07- -3302/3018
07- -4002/3011 400 230 110 QS 7 05-0012-0098 LS 28 05-0012-0016 05-0105-0111
07- -6002/3011 600 230 110 QS 7 05-0012-0098 LS 28 05-0012-0111 05-0105-0112
07- -4003/1011
400 310 110 QS 13 05-0012-0099 LS 28 05-0012-0016 05-0105-0115
07- -4002/1018
07- -6003/1011
600 310 110 QS 13 05-0012-0099 LS 28 05-0012-0111 05-0105-0116
07- -6003/1018
03-0330-0203-08/08-BCS-201174/3
QS = diagonal strip/horizontal alignment, e.g.: LS 4 = 4 clamping points for 8 connections LS = horizontal strip/vertical strip, e.g.: QS 3 = 3 clamping points for 6.
116
Aluminium distribution boxes also for Zone 1 and Zone 21
Aluminum distribution box with lid The table on this page applies to the following aluminium distribution boxes with lid:
A IP distribution box 07-5172-..../....
C D Ex e distribution box 07-5101-..../.... 1
Cable glands/
maximum number B
Article no.
Aluminium enclosure Side M12 x 1.5 M16x 1.5 M16 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 M40 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 M63 x 1.5
extended extended
A/B 1 1 1 - - - - - - - 2
07- -0580/6436 C/D - - - - - - - - - -
A/B 3 3 3 - - - - - - -
07- -0980/6436
C/D 1 1 1 - - - - - - -
A/B 6 5 4 - - - - - - -
07- -1500/6436 C/D 1 1 1 - - - - - - -
A/B 5 3 2 2 1 1 - - - - 3
07- -0750/8057 C/D 2 2 2 1 - - - - - -
A/B 9 6 4 3 3 2 - - - -
07- -1250/8057 C/D 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - -
A/B 14 9 6 5 4 3 - - - -
07- -1750/8057 C/D 2 2 2 1 1 - - - - -
A/B 12 10 6 6 5 3 2 1 1 1 4
07- -1221/2080 C/D 4 4 3 2 2 1 1 - - -
A/B 12 9 6 5 4 2 1 1 1 1
07- -1221/2090 C/D 4 4 2 2 2 - - - - -
A/B 27 17 12 11 10 5 3 3 2 2
07- -2201/2080 C/D 4 4 3 2 2 1 1 - - -
A/B 27 17 12 11 10 5 3 3 2 1 5
07- -2201/2090 C/D 4 4 2 2 2 - - - - -
A/B 48 30 22 21 18 9 6 5 - -
07- -3601/2080 C/D 4 4 4 2 2 1 1 - - -
A/B 18 14 8 8 6 4 2 1 1 1
07- -1601/6090 C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 - - - -
A/B 33 26 17 14 12 7 4 3 3 2 6
07- -2601/6090 C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 - - - -
A/B 48 38 24 20 18 10 6 5 4 3
07- -3601/6090 C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 - - - -
A/B 84 60 42 34 28 20 10 8 6 4
07- -5601/6090 C/D 8 8 5 4 4 2 - - - -
A/B 38 24 16 15 12 8 5 3 2 2
07- -2002/3011 C/D 20 15 10 10 6 4 3 2 2 1 7
07- -2002/3018 A/B 64 36 25 25 16 16 9 4 4 4

C/D 56 42 25 25 16 16 9 4 4 4
A/B 58 30 25 23 20 11 8 4 3 2
07- -2802/3011 C/D 20 15 10 10 6 4 3 2 2 -
A/B 70 46 30 28 24 14 10 5 4 2
07- -3302/3011
C/D 20 15 10 10 6 4 3 2 2 1
07- -3302/3018 A/B 120 72 50 45 32 28 18 8 8 6

C/D 56 36 25 25 16 12 9 4 4 4
A/B 58 56 38 35 30 17 12 6 4 3
07- -4002/3011
C/D 20 15 10 10 6 4 3 2 2 1
A/B 126 84 56 52 46 24 18 8 6 4
07- -6002/3011 C/D 25 15 10 10 6 4 3 2 2 1
A/B 85 56 38 35 30 17 12 6 4 3
07- -4003/1011 C/D 30 25 20 18 10 5 4 2 2 1
A/B 144 90 65 60 44 36 21 12 10 8
07- -4003/1018 C/D 84 60 45 40 28 24 15 8 6 6
A/B 126 84 56 52 46 24 18 8 6 4
07- -6003/1011
03-0330-0203-08/08-BCS-201174/4
C/D 30 25 20 18 10 5 4 2 2 1
07- -6003/1018 A/B 208 132 90 90 80 56 30 16 16 12
C/D 84 60 45 40 28 18 15 8 6 6
117
High quality stainless steel
enclosures/distribution boxes/cabinets for Zone 1 and Zone 21
Stainless steel
enclosures/
distribution boxes/
cabinets

 Customer-specific designs also for Ex protection type
non-explosion-hazard zones acc. to EN 60079-0 for empty enclosures/
 Approved in accordance with directive cabinets
94/9/EC II 2G Ex e II
 Long service life acc. to EN 60079-0 for distribution boxes

II 2G Ex e II T5, T6
 Sea water resistant II 2G Ex [ia/ib] II C T5, T6
 High IP rating II 2D Ex tD A21 IP65 T 80 °C
 Ex approval for distribution boxes available Certification

Empty enclosure IBExU99ATEX1118 U
 Flanges on 5 housing walls possible IECEx IBE 09.0016 U
Terminal box IBExU99ATEX1096
IECEx IBE 09.0017
Description INMETRO (Brazil) 2009ECO2CP015U
BARTEC stainless steel housings and distribu- GOST-R (Russia) POCC SI.ME 92.B01671
tion boxes are designed and approved for Zone 1 RTN (Russia) PPC 00-33604
and 2 as well as Zone 21 and 22. Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +40 °C at T6
They are particularly suitable for applications
-20 °C to +55 °C at T5
under extreme environmental conditions, and they
-55 °C with silicone hose line
provide reliable protection under heavy loads.
(only for enclosures without flanges)
The housings are made from 1.4301 (V2 A) or
1.4404 stainless steel (V4 A).
The series includes empty housings and distri- Technical data
bution boxes with door or cover. From a housing Material
height of 120 mm, the housings can be supplied 1.4301, AISI 304 high quality stainless steel
with or without flange plates. optional
In addition to 25 standard sizes, approved 1.4404, AISI 316 L high quality stainless steel
customer-specific design variants are also Surface
available. brushed, painted or electro polished
Scope of delivery on request
The scope of delivery includes wall attachment Standard seals

EPDM
straps, internal and external PE connection, as
well as a mounting plate for the empty housings/ Mechanical strength
distribution cabinets. Impact energy 7 Nm
03-0330-0204/A-02/10-BCS-201175/1
Version
with or without gland plated
Standard sizes
see selection chart
Protection class acc. to IEC 60529
max. IP 66
118
High quality stainless steel
Enclosure dimensions
only at L = 600
2
Cabinet dimensions
5
H < 1000 two turnbuckle locks
H > 1000 three turnbuckle locks

03-0330-0204/A-02/10-BCS-201175/2
119
High-quality stainless steel
High-quality stainless steel

enclosures/distribution boxes/cabinets
Selection chart
A
Gland plates openings
C E D
minimum depth for flanges 120 mm
B
Version Code Enclosure with lid Code Enclosure with Code Flanges Code Flanges Code
no. in mm (w x h x d) no. hinged door no. Side A, B, (E) no. Side C, D, (E) no.
in mm (w x h x d)
100 x 100 x 60 17
Empty 200 x 300 x 155 51 without 1
1 without 1
Enclosure Ex e
150 x 150 x 80 01
400 x 150 x 80 10 380 x 300 x 155 54

Face A 2
Distribution Box
2 200 x 200 x 80 03 Face C 2
Ex e II
300 x 380 x 210 52
300 x 200 x 80 22
Face B 3
Distribution Box 150 x 150 x 100 02 400 x 400 x 210 57
3 Face D 3
Ex e [ia/ib] II C
200 x 200 x 120 04
Face A + B 4
400 x 600 x 210 58
300 x 200 x 120 06
Distribution Box
4 Face C + D 4
Ex i II
400 x 200 x 120 11
600 x 600 x 210 59
Face E + A 5
600 x 200 x 120 25
Distribution Box
5 600 x 760 x 210 60 Face E + C 5
Ex e I 300 x 300 x 120 07
Face E + B 6
300 x 300 x 160 08
600 x 800 x 300 61
Distribution Box 380 x 380 x 160 26 Face E + D 6
6
Ex i I Face E + A + B 7
400 x 200 x 160 12 800 x 800 x 300 62
400 x 400 x 160 14

Distribution Box Face E + D + C 7
7 Face E 8
Non-Ex 800 x 1000 x 300 63
500 x 400 x 160 15
or
03-0330-0204-08/08-BCS-201175/3
Complete order no. 07-56 - Design Code no.

304 316 L
Please enter code number. Enclosure with
A B
Example: Ex e distribution box with hinged door screwed lid
Dimensions: 400 x 400 x 210 mm with gland plates on face B + C + D Enclosure
with hinged door C D
Type 07-56D2-5734
120
Accessories for empty enclosures and distribution boxes
On request, BARTEC supplies all

enclosures complete with terminals, cable 1
entries, blanking plugs and other fittings
and components.
Socket-head cap screws

Hinges
Material: aluminium/plastic
2
Opening angle: approx. 170 °
Mounting panels
for enclosures:
galvanised steel plate
Sealable steel lid screws laminate DIN 7735 HP 2061 4
for 80 x 75 to 190 x 75 polyester enclosures
Mounting rail TS 35 5
Material: bare copper, 15 high
Mounting rail TS 32 External fastening strips
Material: galvanised steel plate, bare copper Material: stainless steel
Mounting rail TS 35
Material: galvanised steel plate, 7.5 high 6
Mounting rail TS 15
Lid seal
Material: galvanised steel plate
Material: silicone
Mounting rail TS 10 temperature resistance: Earth bars LS, QS
Material: nickel-plated brass, 10 x 3 (5) mm -55 °C to +100 °C
7
Wall bracket/steel structure
PB Pipe bracket
03-0330-0207-08/08-BCS-201178
Fixing brackets
We supply special fixing brackets for enclosure
mounting on pipes, walls and steel structures.
They are made of high-quality stainless steel and
can be ordered as complete mounting kit with
fixing screws and, on request, bolts for the fixing
onto steel structures. Ask BARTEC for more
detailed information.
121
Customer requirements Terminal Boxes
Customer BARTEC
Street Offer Order
Phone Fax Delivery
Quantity
pieces
Enclosure material
Aluminium, grey
Polyester, grey, not for DustEx
Polyester, black
Stainless steel V2A
Stainless steel V4A
with door
with lid
Further requests
Ex protection type
Ex e DustEx
Ex i Non Ex
Ex e/Ex i IP 65/..
03-0330-0591-09/10-BCS-304849/1
Nominal voltage
AC V
DC V
122
Customer requirements Terminal Boxes
1
4
1 Face A
Face C Face D
3
3
6 4
Face B
5
1 Enclosure size (mm) 4 5 Rail mounted terminals, PA/PE-terminals
Length Width Height Type Cross section Number
2 3 Protective earth conductor bars
Horizontal rail
7
Vertical rail
6 Cable glands/stopping plugs (number)
Cable glands Stopping plugs Face A Face B Face C Face D

03-0330-0591-09/10-BCS-304849/2
Gland plate (only for SS enclosures)
123
Ex rail-mounted terminals
Terminals with EC model test certification

are available in the following executions:
Ex rail-mounted II 2G Ex e Feed-through terminals II 2G Ex e Protective conductor

terminals
terminals II 2G Ex e Tension spring terminals
II 2G Ex i Feed-through terminals
II 2G Ex e Mini-terminals
II 2G Ex i Tension spring terminals
II 2G Ex e Block terminals
II 2G Ex i Mini-terminals
Description Mounting
BARTEC deploys rail-mounted terminals with EC The terminals are mounted on rails and each ter-
model test certification in a variety of electrical minal row is provided with a terminal plate at the
operating equipment. end to cover open clamp sides. The rows are
secured with brackets at both ends to prevent
BARTEC draws not only on its own innovations movement. Terminal strips must be installed in
in this field, but also uses the know-how of other accordance with the operating instructions issued
terminal manufacturers, such as WAGO, Phoenix by the respective manufacturers.
and Weidmüller.
These instructions document the admissible state
BARTEC keeps a stock of terminals and their for the terminal installation required at maximum
associated accessories made by these operating voltages including the necessary
manufacturers and these are installed in accessories. This applies in particular to a mixed
explosion-proofed distributor boxes and at on- arrangement with voltage conducting terminals,
site control points as required by the customer. protective conductors and potential equalisation
terminals, rail-mounted terminals of differing
potentials, and between “inherently safe power
circuits“ and those that are “not inherently safe“.
If jumper bars are used, ensure compliance with
the clearance and creepage distances required for
the operating voltage.
03-0330-0213-08/08-BCS-201182/1
124
Protective conductor terminals and PE terminals
Description
Electrical equipment with operating voltages of
more than 65 Volt need protective conductors. 1
Metal enclosures also need an external protective
conductor connection.
BARTEC supplies these connections in three dif-
ferent sizes. The connections correspond to
Protective conductor terminals VDE 0170 and carry marking or .
2
and PE terminals Installation instructions (A):
Push in square cap (do not hammer in); put on
terminal clamp and fasten screw with spring
washer. Screw type terminals with U-brackets
have to be wired according to EN 60999-1; 2000.
3
Nominal cross section 1,5 mm² Nominal cross section 4,0 mm² Nominal cross section 10 mm² 4
Max. tightening torque 1,2 Nm Max. tightening torque 2,0 Nm Max. tightening torque 3,5 Nm
M4 M5 M6
11.2
15
8.7
5
10 15
6
∅ 8.8 + 0.1*
A ∅ 6.8 + 0.1*
> 10
∅ 4.9 + 0.1*
> 9.5
>8
*Hole diameter in case of aluminium
7
Selection chart
Name Nominal Possible conductors Socket material Order no.

cross section
1.5 mm² 1.5 mm² stranded, 2.5 mm² single wire Ms nickel-plated 05-0012-0038
Earth terminals
1.5 mm² 1.5 mm² stranded, 2.5 mm² single wire Niro steel 05-0012-0039
03-0330-0213-08/08-BCS-201182/2
PE terminals
125
Mini-terminal
Ex protection type
II 2G Ex e II
I M2 Ex e I
Certification
PTB 99 ATEX 3117 U
IECEx PTB 07.0007 U, Ex e II, Ex e I
CSA 2314224
Min. ambient temperature
Mini-terminal -55 °C
Max. operating temperature
+120 °C

 Multi-conductor connection max. 2 x 1 mm 2
Rated voltage
 Operating temperature -55 °C to +120 °C max. 440 V (UL: 300 V)
 Extremely robust Rated current
 Tried and tested a million times over max. 23 A (UL: 16 A)
 For base and rail mounting Rated cross-section
 Bridging is possible 2.5 mm2 (single-, fine- and multi-stranded)
(UL: AWG 24 - 14)
 Clip-on markers
Connection of several conductors of the
same cross section and type
max. 2 x 1 mm2
Description
Operating temperatures without bridges
Ex e I/II mini-terminal -55 °C to +120 °C
The mini terminal allows conductors to be
Operating temperatures with bridges
connected in hazardous areas.
-20 °C to +120 °C
In order to protect from mechanical damage,
touch, dust and moisture, Ex terminals must be Material
installed in increased safety type “e“ enclosures. Insulation duroplast
BARTEC mini-terminals are available as 2 and Terminal copper alloy
3-pole terminals which can be mounted in a row.
Bridge
The clearances and creepage distances allow the 2 and 3-pole bridge
terminals to be mounted directly on metal.
Each individual terminal pole is marked with a Labelling
number or symbol by a clip-on label. plug-in label
2 and 3-pole bridges are available for cross Weight
connection terminals. 2-pole: 13 g
3-pole: 19 g
Ex I/II mini-terminals
for intrinsically safe circuits Mounting
BARTEC mounting rail or base of enclosure
The design of the blue mini-terminal is the same
as that of the Ex e I/II mini-terminal and is tested Contact spacing
in the same way, too. 11 mm
Tightening torque for clamp screw
(EN 60999-1: 2000, TAB 4, III)
03-0330-0209/A-07/10-BCS-201180/1
für clamp screw = 0.4 Nm

(UL: 3.5 lb. in.)
for screw and washer assembly
for fixation = 0.6 Nm
(UL: 5.3 lb. in.)
126
Mini-terminal
2-pole Selection chart

1
Order no.
Mini terminal 2-pole, Ex e, grey 07-9702-0220/1

2
Mini terminal 2-pole, blue 07-9702-0220/2
3
3-pole
Mini terminal 3-pole, Ex e, grey 07-9702-0320/1 4
Mini terminal 3-pole, blue 07-9702-0320/2
2-pole bridge 05-0120-0004
3-pole bridge 05-0120-0005
Rotation stop for base mounting 05-0010-0002

required when a single 2-pole terminal is mounted 7
Rotation stop for rail mounting 05-0106-0015

required when a single 2-pole terminal is mounted
Label
not printed 05-1144-0001
printed 05-1144-0002
0-99, A-Z, symbols on request
1 unit = 100 labels
with the same markings
Similar to DIN EN ISO 1207 Screw combination, M3 l = 11 mm 03-1830-0001

03-0330-0209/A-07/10-BCS-201180/2
(DIN 84) unit 100 pieces l = 12 mm 03-1830-0004

l = 15 mm 03-1830-0005
4.3 M3 3
10
Mounting rail on request

3 x 10 mm or 5 x 10 mm
4 16.5 11 16.5 4
n x 11
127
Terminal block
Description
The continuous demand for increased nominal
insulation voltage and current carrying capacity
in Ex e terminals made us these larger BARTEC
terminal blocks.
Terminals for 4 mm2 and 16 mm2 conductors are
available in 2- and 3-pole versions.
Terminals for 35 mm2 conductors are available in
a 3-pole version. The terminals can be fitted
directly onto a metal base or onto a 10 x 5 mm
Terminal block mounting rail.

 Compact design Nominal insulation voltage
 Low profile 1000 V according to DIN EN 60079-7
 Bridging is possible Nominal voltage
 Base or rail mounting 1100 V
Bridge
Jumper bar, 2- up to 5-pole
Labelling
Explosion protection 2 labels per pole
Ex protection type Mounting
II 2G Ex e II
BARTEC mounting rail or base of enclosure
I M2 Ex e I
Material
Certification
PTB 01 ATEX 1049 U (Type 07-9721-..4....) Insulation Duroplast
PTB 01 ATEX 1050 U (Type 07-9721-..6....) Terminal
PTB 01 ATEX 1051 U (Type 07-9721-..8....) 4 mm2/16 mm2 copper alloy
Ex e II, IECEx PTB 07.0037U 35 mm2 galvanised steel
Min. ambient temperature

-55 °C
Max. operating temperature
+105 °C
Rating cross section 4 mm2 16 mm2 35 mm2
Conductor cross section

stranded 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
2 2
single and multi wire up to 4.0 mm up to 16 mm up to 35 mm2
Max. current carrying capacity 30 A 72 A 120 A

at ambient temp. +40 °C and conductor cross section 4 mm2 16 mm2 35 mm2
03-0330-0210/A-07/10-BCS-201181/1
Weight
2-pole 44 g 68 g -
3-pole 68 g 104 g 285 g
Spacing 20 mm 20 mm 28 mm
Tightening torque of clamp screw 0.8 Nm 2.0 Nm 3.5 Nm
128
Terminal block
Selection chart
1
Order no. Order no.
Terminal block Terminal block

4 mm2, 2-pole 07-9721-0240 4 mm2, 3-pole 07-9721-0340 3
5
Terminal block Terminal block
16 mm2, 2-pole 07-9721-0260 16 mm2, 3-pole 07-9721-0360
label
2pole
to ... 5pole
7
Jumper bar
factory mounted 4 mm2 16 mm2 35 mm2
2-pole 05-0110-0005 05-0110-0007 05-0110-0013

Terminal block 3-pole 05-0110-0006 05-0110-0008 05-0110-0014
35 mm2, 3-pole 07-9721-0380 4-pole 05-0110-0011 05-0110-0009 05-0110-0015
5-pole 05-0110-0012 05-0110-0010 05-0110-0016
Rotation stop for floor mounting 05-0010-0004 Similar to

required when a single 2-pole DIN EN Fixing screw 03-1040-0001
terminal is mounted ISO 1207 M 4 x 10 mm for the insulator
(DIN 84)
5.3
DIN 127 Spring washer B 4 03-3140-0001
4.5 4.5
03-0330-0210/A-07/10-BCS-201181/2
Rail 5 x 10 mm spacing 20 on request Labels

not printed 03-3600-0007
5.3 printed as per column 1 (1 - 10, 11 - 20) 03-3600-0011
printed as per column 2 (1 - 50) 03-3600-0001
printed, L1, L2, L3, N, PE 03-3600-0012
4.5 4.5 printed to customer specifications 03-3600-0013
1 unit = 50 Labels
Rail 5 x 10 mm spacing 28 on request
129
Cable gland

The cable gland made of polyamide is used for
Ex protection type
inserting permanent cables and leads into
II 2G Ex e II
electrical equipment with the increased safety “e“
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 68
type of explosion protection. The cable glands
conform to the protection class IP 66/68. Certification
For intrinsically safe circuits the cable entries are PTB 05 ATEX 1068 X
available with a blue cap nut. Operating temperature
When this cable gland is used, the instructions -40 °C to +75 °C
given in the type examination certificate/operating
instructions must be observed.
Cable gland Technical data
Dimensions Material
Polyamid, self-extinguishing
Seals
EPDM
L1
Colour
L2
RAL 9005, black
RAL 5015, blue
Protection class (EN 60529)
IP 66/IP 68
AF
Selection chart
Thread size Cable range Across flat Thread length Length in mm Unit Order no.
(∅) (AF) (L2) (L1)
Cable gland Ex e, black
M12 x 1.5 3-6 16 15 35 - 45 50 03-6062-0137
M16 x 1.5 4-9 20 9 31 - 37 50 03-6062-0126
M20 x 1.5 6 - 13 24 10 36 - 45 50 03-6062-0127
M25 x 1.5 7 - 12 29 10 38 - 47 50 03-6062-0128
M25 x 1.5 10 - 17 29 10 38 - 47 50 03-6062-0136
M32 x 1.5 13 - 21 36 12 42 - 51 25 03-6062-0129
M40 x 1.5 17 - 28 46 12 52 - 65 10 03-6062-0130
M50 x 1.5 23 - 35 55 14 59 - 72 5 03-6062-0125
M63 x 1.5 31 - 48 68 15 64 - 78 1 03-6062-0131

Cable glands Ex e black, with long connection thread on request.
Cable gland Ex i, with blue cap nut

M12 x 1.5 3-6 16 15 35 - 45 50 03-6065-0074
M16 x 1.5 4-9 20 9 31 - 37 50 03-6065-0066
M20 x 1.5 6 - 13 24 10 36 - 45 50 03-6065-0067

03-0330-0492-08/08-BCS-280071
M25 x 1.5 7 - 12 29 10 38 - 47 50 03-6065-0068
M25 x 1.5 10 - 17 29 10 38 - 47 50 03-6065-0073
M32 x 1.5 13 - 21 36 12 42 - 51 25 03-6065-0069
M40 x 1.5 17 - 28 46 12 52 - 65 10 03-6065-0070
M50 x 1.5 23 - 35 55 14 59 - 72 5 03-6065-0071
M63 x 1.5 31 - 48 68 15 64 - 78 1 03-6065-0072
130
Screw plugs

Screw plugs for closing unused boreholes in
Ex protection type 1
enclosures for the hazardous area in accordance
II 2G Ex e II
with EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-7.
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 68
For assembly purposes the outer shape and
internal recess of the screw plug head are Certification
hexagonal. PTB 06 ATEX 1032 X
2
Dimensions Technical data
Protection class
Screw plugs TL
15
IP 68
Material
Body polyamide 3
2
O-ring EPDM
SW 1
SW 2
D
Operating temperature -40 °C to +75 °C
Colour black
10
E1
15
4
Selection chart 5
D (mm) AF* 1 (mm) AF* 2 (mm) E1 (mm) TL (mm) Nm Order no.
M12 x 1.5 16 6 18 19 2 03-5210-0092
6
M16 x 1.5 20 8 22 19 2 03-5210-0085
M20 x 1.5 24 8 26 19 2 03-5210-0089
M25 x 1.5 29 8 31 20 5 03-5210-0090 7
M32 x 1.5 36 8 39 20 5 03-5210-0091
M40 x 1.5 46 8 50 20 10 03-5210-0086
M50 x 1.5 55 8 60 20 10 03-5210-0087
M63 x 1.5 68 8 73 20 10 03-5210-0088
*AF = Across flat

03-0330-0213-08/08-BCS-201184
131
Switches
Insert switch/limit switch
Insert switch Limit switch
Description Dimensions in mm
Insert switch with connection cores
19
This switching element can be universally used
9.5
8.1
for switching, controlling and regulating
5.9
operations within Ex-areas. The insert switch is
audited by the PTB according to the latest
34.2
46.2
EC guideline 94/9/EC. Devices equipped with
3.2
these insert switches have to be approved by a
testing authority, the switch itself needs not be
retested. 25.5
Insert switch
The cores are cast-in at the back of the switch. **
Limit switch
Their standard length is 500 mm; other lengths
11.3
15.8
are available on request. To connect the cores we
recommend the miniterminals from BARTEC.
Double switch
Single switch
Limit switch witch connection cable

The limit switches have been developed for
Ex-areas where safe and reliable signalling is
required, for example on pumps, petrol pumps,
as well as in mechanical and high-tec
engineering. The switches must be mounted into
the respective devices or systems in such a way Clip-on pockets
as to guarantee mechanical protection. No furt-
her tests are required. The connection cable is
cast in on the back of the switch. For the
connection in Ex-areas BARTEC provides a large
variety of terminals and terminal boxes.
Ex protection type
Insert switch II 2G Ex d IIC
I M2 Ex d I
Limit switch II 2G Ex d IIC T6
II 2D Ex DA21 IP 66 T 80 °C
Certifications
Insert switch PTB 98 ATEX 1032 U
IECEx PTB 07.0040 U
Limit switch PTB 00 ATEX 1093 X Lever widths
03-0330-0154/A-07/10-BCS-129306/1
IBExU01ATEX1007 X
IECEx PTB 07.0045 X
Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +40 °C (-55 °C to +75 °C)
-20 °C to +75 °C for DustEx
-55 °C on request
134
Technical data Service life

mechanical > 2 x 106
Ex d insert switch/limit switch
electrical dependent on load
1
EN 60947-5-1
EN 60947-1 max. switching rate 1000 operations/h
Protection class Switching actuation force
IEC/EN 60529:IP 66
Single-break switch max. 2.0 N
 Electrical data for control switch
Double-break switch max. 3.6 N
in accordance with DIN EN 60947-5-1 2
Rated operating voltage AC 400 V Reset force
Utilization category Single-break switch min. 0.4 N
AC-15 2A 400 V
Double-break switch min. 0.8 N
DC-13 0.15 A 250 V
Isolation voltage 400 V Operating rate > 10 μm/sec.
(further electrical data on request) 3
 Electrical data for switch - Insert switch: cores 4 GAF 0.75
Rated current - Limit switch:
AC 2A 400 V cable H05VV-F 0.75/A05VV-F 0.75
AC 7A 250 V (other cables on request)
DC 0.5 A 250 V
(further electrical data on request) Conductor diameter 4
2-wire 6.1 ± 0.3 mm
Ambient temperature +40 °C 3-wire 6.6 ± 0.3 mm
AC switching capacity 4-wire 6.7 ± 0.3 mm
ohmic load inductive load 6-wire 8.9 ± 0.3 mm
cos ϕ = 0,6
400 V 3A 2A Contact element
250 V 5A 3A snap-action contact element (double-break) 5
30 V 7A 5A as, normally-open, normally-closed,
DC switching capacity changeover contact as well as N/0 + N/C
ohmic load inductive load contacts for circuits with equal potentials.
L/R = 3 μs
250 V 0.4 A 0.03 A Contact material
30 V 7A 5A Silver or gold-coated contacts
(all contact elements have a standard protective 6
Tightening torque of fixing screws
gold-coating as standard)
0.6 Nm
Rating of gold-coated contacts Double-break switch (switch options)
Voltage: min. 5 V/max. 30 V - simultaneous switch sequence:
Current: min. 4 mA/max. 400 mA chamber I and II almost simultaneous
- the product of voltage and current - defined switch sequence: 7

should not exceed 0.12 VA chamber I switches mechanically safe 0.03
up to 0.3 mm before chamber II
- for alternating current these values have to
be interpreted as peak values Weight
Contact Travels - Insert switch with 500 mm cores:
single-break switch 35 g,
Rest position double-break switch 70 g
LLW
- Limit switch with 3 m cable:

WHG
VLW
single-break switch 210 g,

DW
Switching point double-break switch 415 g

RLW
NLW
Housing material
plastic (thermoplastics)
End position
Plunger/additional actuator
Contact break distance 2 x ≥ 0.3 mm
stainless steel
Contact travels (in mm)
03-0330-0154/A-07/10-BCS-129306/2
Pretravel VLW max. 0.9 Technical data subject to change without notice.
Overtravel NLW min. 0.5
Differential value DW max. 0.45
Release travel RLW 0.9
Release travel LLW 0.1 to 0.45
Repeat accuracy
WHG (for repetetive ± 0.02
actuation)
135
Selection chart Single-break switch

Type of contact Additional actuator*
Code Code Code

Switch chamber 1 no. Options no. Options no.
without additional actuator 00

44
01
10 45
02
03
46
04
20 21 47
22 48
23 49
30
plastic roller 61
24 metal roller 62
plastic roller 63
41 metal roller 64
plastic roller 66
40 42
43 adjusting screw 73
Complete order no. 07- 511- /

Length of connection cores in 100 mm
03-0330-0154-08/08-BCS-129306/3
e.g. 5 = 500 mm
( ) Code for connection cable Length of connection cable in meters
e.g. 3 = 3 m
* Dimensions for additional Please specify greater lengths in plain text, code no. = 0
actuator are reference values Insert switch
1
with connection cores Contact material
** When packing several switches,
these dimensions are reduced Limit switch 1 Silver
to 11 mm resp. 15.5 mm with connection cable 2
3 Gold-coated contacts
136
Selection chart Double-break switch

1
Switch Switch Code Code Code

no. Varianten no. Varianten no.
chamber 1 chamber 2
without additional actuator 00
11 44 2
01
simultaneous switch sequence
45
21 02
3
03
22 46
04
4
33 47
21
44 5
22 48
1A
23 49
6
2A
plastic roller 61
defined switch sequence
24 metal roller 62
63 7
2B plastic roller
41 metal roller 64
3C plastic roller 66
42
4D 43 adjusting screw 73
Complete order no. 07- 511- /

Length of connection cores
03-0330-0154/A-07/10-BCS-129306/4
5 = 500 mm
( ) Code for connection cable Length of connection cable
3=3m
* Dimensions for additional Please specify other lengths in plain text, code no. = 0
actuator are reference values Insert switch
1
with connection cores Contact material
** When packing several switches,
these dimensions are reduced Limit switch 1 Silver
to 11 mm resp. 15.5 mm with connection cable 2
137
Miniature insert switch/limit switch
Description
BARTEC miniature switches are used in areas with The connector cable is cast into the back of the
of limited space for a flameproof switching switch. The wires are colour-coded.
element. The (standard) cable length is 3 m; other lengths
They are especially suitable for applications in are available on request.
valves, thermostats, push switches, servo
components, level metres and switching gears. Insert switch with connection cores
The smallest Ex d miniature switch in the world The insert switch with wires is available as a
is encapsulated in a plastic enclosure. The leads building block for your explosion-proofing
or cable tail are potted in at the base. solution.
The standard version of the BARTEC miniature These insert switches are tested and approved by
switches contains fine silver contacts. Other PTB (the Federal Physical-Technical Institute)
contact materials such as gold plated silver or according to Ex Guideline 94/9/EC.
solid gold are available for low currents and After installation, the complete device is tested
voltages. by an authorized institution.
Thanks to its PTB approval, the microswitch itself
Limit switch with connection cable
needs not be individually tested.
Miniature Switches with connector cables have been The leads are individually marked. The length of
approved by PTB with EC model test certification. the cable is 50 cm (standard). Other lengths can
Insert switch/ The switches can therefore be mounted at any time be supplied on request.
into devices and systems which offer mechanical For the connection of the cores we recommend
Limit switch protection – no further testing is required. our BARTEC Ex Mini-terminals.
Explosion protection Technical data Contact travels

- Pretravel (VLW) 0.5 to 1.0 mm
Ex protection type Protection class - Overtravel (NLW) min. 0.2 mm
Limit switch II 2G Ex d IIC T6 IP 54/IEC 60529 - Reset travel (RLW) ~0.55 mm
Insert switch II 2G Ex d IIC Rated voltage - Differential value (DW) max. 0.13 mm
I M2 Ex d I AC 250 V - No-load travel (LLW) ~0.5 mm
FM approved for Class 1, Div. 2 Plunger
Rated current
Certification Switching capacity with AC
Limit switch
with cable tail: PTB 01 ATEX 1005 X ohmic load inductive load
LLW
VLW
DW
IECEx PTB 07.044 X 250 V 5A 5A

30 V 5A 5A
Insert switch
RLW
NLW
Switching capacity with DC

with cores: PTB 98 ATEX 1033 U
IECEx PTB 09.0032 U ohmic load inductive load
The current carrying capacity depends 250 V 0.25 A 0.03 A Mechanical life
on the ambient temperature. 125 V 0.5 A 0.06 A 10 7 switching cycles
75 V 1A 1A
Temperature Ambient Rated 30 V 5A 5A Electrical life
class temperature current at AC dependent on load
T6 65 °C 5A Contact elements Electrical connection
T6 70 °C 4A see table Type 07-2501-....
T5 80 °C 5A Tightening torque of fixing screws LSYY 0.75 mm2 (-40 °C to +70 °C)
T5 90 °C 3A max. 0.6 Nm Type 07-1501-....
Radox 0.75 mm 2 (-55 °C to +90 °C)
Operating force 4GAF 0,75 mm2 (-40 °C to +90 °C)
max. 1.4 N H05V2-K 0.75 mm2 (-40 °C to +80 °C)
03-0330-0156/A-07/10-BCS-129308/1
Release force Enclosure

min. 0.25 N Duroplast
Switching cycles Plunger/additional actuator
max. 1 000/h stainless steel
Weight
with 0.5 m cores approx. 25 g
with 1 m cable approx. 50 g
138
Miniature insert switch/limit switch
Dimensions in mm
3.1
Selection chart
∅2 1
4.5
1.8
Code Options Code
no. no.
22.2
∅ 3.2
28
1 without additional actuator 00

(WH) 2
10 14 4
2.9
0.5
10.3 core ∅ ~ 2.5 mm
18 2 01
(BN)
3.5 3
10
11 3 35 4
0.5
(WH)
3.1 02
20 4
∅2
4.5
3.5
1.8
4
(BN)
0.5
65 4
22.2
28
03 5
2 4
2.9
3.5
10.3 (GN) (BN)
2-adrig ∅ ∼ 5,4 mm
18 3-adrig ∅ ∼ 5,8 mm 20.5 5
30 17 4
6
∅5
1
63
10
(WH) 5.7
11
( ) specification for
connection cable 7
Complete 07- 501- /

order no.
Length of connection cores
5 = 500 mm
Length of connection cable
3=3m
Please specify other lengths in plain text, code no. = 0
Insert switch
1
with connection cores
Contact material
Limit switch 6 Silver
with connection cable 2
03-0330-0156/A-07/10-BCS-129308/2
Special versions, please specify in text

* Dimensions for a additional  precision switch with differential value 0.04 ± 0.02 (switching capacity 1 A), Type 07-.501-5.../..
actuator are reference values  different ambient temperature
139
Limit switch plastic encapsulated
Explosion protection Switching capacity

Ex protection type with AC 15 with DC 13
II 2G Ex d IIC T6/T5 250 V 6A -
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C/90 °C 230 V - 0.25 A
Certification  Mechanical datas
PTB 03 ATEX 1143 X
Switching point tolerance
Ambient temperature ± 0.5 mm depending on the actuator
-20 °C to +65 °C for T6
-20 °C to +90 °C for T5 at 3 A Actuality force tolerance
±1N
Limit switch Repeat accuracy of switching

± 0.02 mm
Technical data
plastic encapsulated Protection class
Mechanical life cycles
5 x 106 cycles
IEC/EN 60529:IP 65
Max. switching frequency
Enclosure
1 800 cycles/h
shock-resistant thermoplastic material,
self-extinguishing Vibration resistance
UL 94-VO 10 g at 10 to 2 000 Hz
Switching element Shock resistance/shock stability
1 NO/1 NC contact 50 g at a shock duration 6 ms
both galvanically isolated
NC contact with pos. break
Features (VDE 0113, Teil 1)
 Positive break contacts Connection
 Very robust construction 4 core cable H05VV-F
 IP 65 protection class cross section: 0.75 mm²
cable length: 3 meters
 13 different actuator versions other lengths on request
 Operator protection in accordance
with GS-ET 15 Colour coding of the flexible leads
11 = BN 11 2
12 = BU
23 = BK
24 = GY
12 24
Electrical structure
Description EN 60947-5-1
Besides the metal-enclosed precision switch of EN 60947-1
the RET series, BARTEC also offers a series of Nominal voltage
limit switches with plastic bodies. The enclosure AC 250 V/DC 230 V
is made of shock impact resistant proof plastic
providing an IP 65 protection class according to Nominal current
IEC/EN 60529. Due to its format several limit AC 6 A
switches can be mounted in tandem formation DC 0.25 A
requiring very little space.
This allows a multiple triggering of switching
operations. The connection cable is equipped with
a strain relief device, prewired and safely cast into Dimensions
the enclosure by means of epoxy resin. We supply
this robust limit switch with a standard length of 40 ∅10
3 m; special lengths are available on request.
The integrated switching element changes over
17.5
via NC contact with positive break operation. Ope-

03-0330-0157-08/08-BCS-A129309/1
rator protection corresponds the the GS-ET 15

7.5
∅ 5.6
∅10
requirements.
Its high vibration resistance and long life are the 25 5.5
result of a most extensive laboratory research. The 16
49
certification for hazardous areas and the high

protection class granted thanks to its structural
characteristics are the ideal prerequisites for its
use in almost all fields of automation, mechanical
and high-tec engineering.
140
Limit switch plastic encapsulated
Selection chart
Membrane plunger Spherical membrane plunger
1
Plunger Spherical plunger
07-2961-1.62/01 07-2961-1.62/02 07-2961-1.62/03 07-2961-1.62/04
3
Roller plunger Membrane roller plunger Membrane roller lever Membrane roller lever, long
07-2961-1.62/09 07-2961-1.62/10 07-2961-1.62/14 07-2961-1.62/16
5
Membrane roller toggle lever Parallel roller lever Front mounting/dome plunger Front mounting/spherical
07-2961-1.62/18 07-2961-1.62/20 07-2961-1.62/47 plunger 07-2961-1.62/49
Front mounting/roller lever

07-2961-1.62/51
Complete
order no. 07-2961-1 62/
Bitte Kennziffer einsetzen
Cable length
3 meters 3
Special lengths on request 0 Actuator
Contact travel diagram

mm N
17.5 0 4,9
03-0330-0157-08/08-BCS-A129309/2
16 1.5 8,8
14.5 3 12,7
12 5.5 19,6 Actuating force

Plunger travel
Plunger position
reference to fixing holes
141
Limit switch metal encapsulated
Explosion protection  Electrical data
Ex protection type Type of contact

II 2G Ex d IIC T6 single-pole changeover contact
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP 65 T 80 °C Contact resistance
Certification 60 mΩ, measure at the end of the
PTB 03 ATEX 1142 X cable a cable length of 1 metre
Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C for T6  Mechanical data
-20 °C to +90 °C for T5 at 3 A
Switching point tolerance
Limit switch ± 0.5 mm depending on the actuator
Technical data
metal encapsulated Switching force tolerance
±1N
Protection class
IEC/EN 60529:IP 65 Repeat accuracy
Enclosure ± 0.1 mm
aluminium-alloy, hard-coated Mechanical life
Switching element 106 switching cycles
integrated micro-switch Vibration resistance
Connection 10 g at 10 to 2 000 Hz
4-core cable (H05VV-F) Shock resistance/shock stability
Features cross section: 0.75 mm² 50 g at a shock duration of 6 ms
 Very robust construction cable length: 1 m
other lengths on request Cable outlet
 IP 67 type of protection - bottom
Coloured flexible leads 2 4 - side
 A choice of cable exit positions 1 = GY (BN) (BK)
- with bottom screw socket
 16 different actuator versions 2 = BN - with lateral screw socket
4 = BK
PE = GN/YE 1
(GY)
Description
Equipotential bonding
Limit switches of the RET range are metal- external Ex terminals
encapsulated precision switches with a robust and
compact explosion-proof structures. Utilization category
AC 15 5A 250 V
Our connection cable comes prewired, is equip- DC 13 0.16 A 230 V
ped with a strain-relief device and safely cast into
the enclosure. We supply this robust limit switch Switching capacity
with a standard cable length of three meter. Spe- AC DC (induct.) DC (ohmic)
cial cable lengths and switches with lateral cable 250 V 6.5 A - -
outlets are available on request. The integrated -
220 V 0.16 A -
basic switch has a single-pole changeover con-
110 V - 0.2 A 0.5 A
tact with high switching accuracy and a
precise repeatability of the switching point. 60 V - 0.5 A 1.0 A
24 V - 4.0 A 5.0 A
Its high vibration resistance and long mechani-
12 V - 6.5 A 6.5 A
cal life are the result of extensive laboratory tests.
The high protection class, IP 67, allows the switch
to be used in nearly all fields of automation,
mechanical and high-tec engineering.

40 ∅ 10 Contact material Code Cable outlet Code Cable length Code
no. no. no.
03-0330-0158/A-07/10-BCS-129310/1
∅ 5.6
bottom 1
∅ 10
Ag 1
17.5
3m 3
7.5
side 2
15
Ag Au 0.1 A 3
5.5 with bottom screw socket 3 special lengths
46
on request 0
6 ∅ 16 Au 0.1 A 4 with lateral screw socket 4
Complete
Actuator
order no. 07-295 - 30/
142
Limit switch metal encapsulated
Dimensional drawings and contact travel diagrams

Plunger Membrane plunger Spherical plunger Spherical membrane plunger
1
07-2951-..30/01 07-2951-..30/02 07-2951-..30/03 07-2951-..30/04
stainless steel ball
∅ 8 mm
* * * *
Roller plunger Membrane roller plunger Membrane roller lever Membrane roller lever, long
07-2951-..30/09 07-2951-..30/10 07-2951-..30/14 07-2951-..30/16 3
* * * *
Membrane toggle roller lever Parallel roller lever Feeler lever Feeler-butt lever
07-2951-..30/18 07-2951-..30/20 07-2951-..30/32 07-2951-..30/34
5
* *
** **
Feeler plastic lever Front-mounting dome plunger Front-mounting spherical Front-mounting-roller lever
07-2951-..30/36 07-2951-..30/47 plunger 07-2951-..30/49 07-2951-..30/51 7
** * *
* Contact travel diagram ** Contact travel diagram Cable outlet

mm N 10° bottom side
18 ° 0°
0
1-2
1-4
1.5 9.5 1.2 N
actuating force
03-0330-0158-08/08-BCS-129310/2
contact travel
with lateral screw socket
with
bottom
5.5 actuating force * Dimensions for an additional screw
1-2 1-4 plunger travel actuator are reference values socket
All dimensioned drawings and wiring diagrams are drawn without protective earth connection.
143
Position switch Aluminium
Ex protection type
II 2G Ex d IIC T6
Installation
Type 07-2511
Certification
PTB 00 ATEX 1093 X
Position switch IBExU01ATEX1007 X
IECEx PTB 07.0045 X
Ambient temperature
-20 °C to +60 °C
(-55 °C to +90 °C on request)
Technical data
Protection class
IEC/EN 60529:IP 66
 Electrical data according to
DIN EN 60947-5-1
Rated operating voltage AC 400 V
Utilisation category
AC 15 2A 400 V
DC 13 0.15 A 250 V
Isolation voltage 400 V
(further electrical data on request)
 Electrical data
Nominal current
AC 2A 400 V
AC 7A 250 V
Features DC 0,5 A 250 V
 Dimensions and mounting dimensions (further electrical data on request)
according to DIN EN 50041 Ambient temperature +40 °C
 Compatible with non-Ex DIN limit switches Switching capacity AC
ohmic load inductive load
 Different switching elements cosϕ = 0.6
400 V 3A 2A
250 V 5A 3A
Description 30 V 7A 5A
Schaltleistung bei DC
All dimensions and actuating elements of the ohmic load inductive load
Ex d position switch correspond to the DIN L/R = 3 μs
EN 50041 standard. 250 V 0.4 A 0.03 A
30 V 7A 5A
Its 30 x 60 mm mounting dimensions make the
switch directly compatible to the position switch Switching elements
corresponding to the same DIN standard. The see table
switch is equipped with snap-action contacts
Travels, forces
with several switching element versions. A micro-
see table
switch with connection cable Type 07-2511 is
mounted as switching element. Max. switching frequency
1 000 h
Different actuators are available for the variety of
actuating possibilities. After the removal of four Mechanical life
screws these knobs can be rotated by 90 °C max. 106 switching cycles
03-0330-0160/A-07/10-BCS-129312/1
allowing so four different directions of actuation. depending on plunger operating

speed and angle
Gold-plated or gold-nickel contacts are available
for the switching of low currents of voltages. Electrical life
dependent on load
Standard length of the connection cables are 3 m.
BARTEC has designed a very extensive range of connection cable HO5VV-F/AO5VV-F
Ex e terminal boxes of polyester and aluminium
for the connection of the position switch within Enclosure material
the Ex area. aluminium
144
Position switch Aluminium
Dimensions*
Selection chart
Plunger (Code no. 10)
Type of contact Actuators 1
∅ 10 16
Interrupter Interrupter Code Max. Pretravel Overtravel Differential Max. plunger Code
23
chamber chamber no. operating approx. operating no.

7.5
1 2 force speed
∅ 5.3
74.5
1
60
(BN) 2
2
10
2
(BU)
30 17 N 1 mm 5 mm 0.4 mm 5 m/s 10
38 3
40 (BN)
3
Roll lever (Code no. 20) 20
16 4
∅ 18 4 (BU)
2 4
(GY) (BN)
45
30 4
7.5
1
∅ 5.3
(BK)
74.5
60
11 21
(BK) (BU)
17 N 1 mm 5 mm 0.4 mm 5 m/s 20
2
11
5
12 22
30 (GY) (BN)
38
40
13 23
(BK) (BU)
Axle lever (Code no. 30) 22

60
14 24 6
° 85 8 (GY) (BN)
85
∅ 18
°
16
30.5
13 21
(BK) (BU)
17.5
21 30
7.5
6N 10° 70° 4° 5 m/s

∅ 5.3
14 22
74.5
60
(GY) (BN)
7
12 14 22 24
2
(2) (3) (5) (6)
30
33
38 11 21 other actuators on request
40
(1) (4)
( ) specification for cable tail
Complete order no. 07-2911-1 /

Special versions, Length of connection cable

please specify clearly 3=3m
03-0330-0160/A-07/10-BCS-129312/2
please specify other length in text, plain text

 gold-plated contacts code no. 0
 different ambient temperature
*Dimensions for actuator are reference values
145
Position switch Thermoplastic
Position switch without actuator
Ex protection type
II 2G Ex d IIC T6
II 2D Ex tD A21 IP65 T80 °C
CE 0044
Certification
PTB 09 ATEX 1048 X
Ambient temperature
Operation -20 °C to +60 °C
Storage, transport -20 °C to +80 °C
Approved for Zone
1 + 21 and 2 + 22
Technical data
Protection class
IP 66 (IEC/EN 60529)
Position switch Weight
approx. 160 g
 Mechanical switching unit

Features 400 V
 Dimensions and mounting dimensions Rated operating voltage/current

according to DIN EN 50041 AC 15 4A 400 V
AC 15 6A 24 V and 240 V
 Electronic switching inserts with DC 13 3A 24 V
individually adjustable switching points DC 13 0.8 A 110 V
 Analog switching inserts can transmit DC 13 0.3 A 220 V
through current or voltage paths
Rated impulse strength
 All mechanical N/C contacts as positive 4 kV AC
opening operation contacts
 Actuating elements can be turned by 4 x 90° Switching frequency
up to 6000/h depending on the type
 Model with Ex d “flameproof enclosure“
type of protection Service life
mechanical max. 106 switching cycles
depending on plunger operating angle/speed
Description
Position switches are used wherever movable  Electronic switching unit
parts on machinery and systems have to be
positioned, controlled and monitored. Rated voltage
up to DC 30 V
They control and facilitate signalling in switching
gear or function as switches in regulating and Rated operating voltage/current
control devices. DC 12 V 0.015 A
DC 24 V 0.018 A
The flameproof encapsulated BARTEC position DC 30 V 0.019 A
switches can be used in hazardous (potentially
explosive) areas in Zones 1 and 2 in accordance Tightening torques
with the certified explosion subgroups IIA, IIB and Lid screws max. 0.9 Nm
03-0330-0584-05/11-BCS-303057/1
IIC and the temperature class T6 and in Zones 21 Pressure screw 5 Nm

and 22 according to the certified maximum Enclosure/plunger material
surface temperature. Thermoplastic
146
Actuator Cable entries
Technical data Technical data 1

Weight Pressure screw
depending on the model M20 x 1.5
Tightening torque Conductor diameter 5 to 8.4 mm Conductor diameter 8 to 12 mm
Actuator screws 0.9 Nm Washer Washer:
Outer diameter 18.3 mm Outer diameter 18.3 mm 2
Inner diameter 8.7 mm Inner diameter 12.2 mm
Thickness 1 mm Thickness 1 mm
Sealing ring (fitted, without marking) Sealing ring (without marking)
Outer diameter 18.5 mm Outer diameter 18.5 mm
Inner diameter 8.4 mm Inner diameter 11.7 mm
Height 13 mm Height 13 mm 3
Dimensions
4
46.3
8
17
∅ 5.5 5
SW24
Cable diameter
5 up to 12 mm
42.5
30
6
5.5
1.5
12.5
60
ca. 103
Selection chart
Switching function Type of contact Code Actuator Code
no. no.
Non-overlapping contact making opening contact /Positive opening contact 166 Dome plunger S-AT4 01
Non-overlapping contact making N.O. contact/N.O. contact 122 Roller plunger RS-AT4 03
Roller lever AR-AT4 05
Non-overlapping contact making N.O. contact/Positive opening contact 126
Pivoted lever R-AT4, ∅ 18, HR 311 09
Overlapping contact making N.O. contact/Positive opening contact 226 Pivoted lever R-AT4, ∅ 30, HR 416 10
Snap-action contact element N.O. contact/Positive opening contact 326 Pivoted lever R-AT4, adjustable, HV 13
Switching point electronically adjustable N.O. contacts/N.C. contact 421 Pivoted lever R-AT4, with rod, plastic HHK 14
Pivoted lever R-AT4, with rod, metal HHA 15
Switching point electronically adjustable N.C. contact/N.C. contact 411
Spring steel L=160 16
03-0330-0584-05/11-BCS-303057/2
Analog switch 4 to 20 mA electronic 500 Spring steel L=130 17

Analog switch 0 to 10 V electronic 600 Special version 99
Complete order no. 07-2931-1 /

Please insert correct code.
147
Position switch with dome plunger Position switch with roller plunger
Dimensions Switching forces, actuation torques, Dimensions Switching forces, actuation torques,
contact travel contact travel
∅8 07-2931-112201XX F = max. 20 N ∅ 14 07-2931-112203XX F = max. 20 N

0 4.3 6.0 0 4.3 6.0
13-14 NO 13-14 NO
23-24 NO 23-24 NO
2.1 2.1
38
50
07-2931-112601XX F = max. 20 N 07-2931-112603XX F = max. 20 N
0 4.3 6.0 0 4.3 6.0
13-14 NO 13-14 NO
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
3.0 3.0
07-2931-116601XX F = max. 20 N 07-2931-116603XX F = max. 20 N

0 3.0 6.0 0 3.0 6.0
17
11-12 NC 11-12 NC
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
17
3.0 3.0
07-2931-122601XX F = max. 20 N 07-2931-122603XX F = max. 20 N

0 3.0 6.0 0 3.0 6.0
15-16 NC 15-16 NC
27-28 NO 27-28 NO
2.1 2.1
07-2931-132601XX F = max. 20 N 07-2931-132603XX F = max. 20 N

0 3.0 6.0 0 3.0 6.0
21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
1.6 1.6
07-2931-141101XX F = max. 20 N 07-2931-141103XX F = max. 20 N

0 1.0 5.0 6.0 0 1.0 5.0 6.0
Q1 Q1
Q2 Q2
Contact closed 3.0 *) Contact closed 3.0 *)
Contact openly 07-2931-142101XX F = max. 20 N Contact openly 07-2931-142103XX F = max. 20 N

Setting range 0 1.0 5.0 6.0 Setting range 0 1.0 5.0 6.0
Q1 Q1
*) Factory setting Q2 *) Factory setting Q2
3.0 *) 3.0 *)
Position switch with roller lever Position switch with pivoted lever
∅ 22 07-2931-112205XX F = max. 10 N ∅18 07-2931-112209-....12XX M = max. 0,35 Nm

0 4.3 6.0 ° 72 0 60° 72°
13-14 NO 72 ° 13-14 NO
23-24 NO 23-24 NO
2.1 35°
53
30
07-2931-112605XX F = max. 10 N 07-2931-112609-....12XX M = max. 0,35 Nm

54.5
0 4.3 6.0 0° 60° 72°

13-14 NO 13-14 NO
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
3.0 40°

4
0 3.0 6.0 0° 72°
11-12 NC 11-12 NC
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
17
3.0 40°

0 3.0 6.0 0° 40° 72°
15-16 NC 15-16 NC
57
66
27-28 NO 27-28 NO
2.1 30°

0 3.0 6.0 0° 40° 72°
21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
03-0330-0584-07/10-BCS-303057/3
13-14 13-14
1.6 25°

0 1.0 5.0 6.0 0° 20° 60° 72°
Q1 Q1
Q2 Q2
Contact closed 3.0 *) Contact closed 40° *)
Contact openly 07-2931-142105XX F = max. 10 N Contact openly 07-2931-142109-....12XX M = max. 0,35 Nm

Setting range 0 1.0 5.0 6.0 Setting range 0° 20° 60° 72°
Q1 Q1
3.0 *) 40° *)
148
Position switch with pivoted lever, adjustable Position switch with pivoted lever, with rod
1
∅ 18 07-2931-112213XX M = max. 0,35 Nm 07-2931-112214-...15XX M = max. 0,35 Nm
∅6
0 60° 72° 0 60° 72°
13-14 NO 13-14 NO
23-24 NO 23-24 NO
27 35° 35°
< 213.5
° 72
72 °
2° 72
78.5 - 178.5
7 07-2931-112613XX M = max. 0,35 Nm 07-2931-112614-...15XX M = max. 0,35 Nm

°
0° 60° 72° 0° 60° 72° 2
13-14 NO 13-14 NO
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
24.5
40° 40°
24.5
07-2931-116613XX M = max. 0,35 Nm 07-2931-116614-...15XX M = max. 0,35 Nm
0° 40° 72° 0° 40° 72°

11-12 NC 11-12 NC
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
40° 40° 3
0° 40° 72° 0° 40° 72°
53
15-16 NC 15-16 NC
65
60
27-28 NO 27-28 NO
69
30° 30°

0° 40° 72° 0° 40° 72° 4
21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
25° 25°

0° 20° 60° 72° 0° 20° 60° 72°
Q1 Q1
Q2 Q2
Contact closed 40° *) Contact closed 40° *)
5
Contact openly 07-2931-142113XX M = max. 0,35 Nm Contact openly 07-2931-142114-...15XX M = max. 0,35 Nm
Setting range 0° 20° 60° 72° Setting range 0° 20° 60° 72°
Q1 Q1
40° *) 40° *)
Position switch with spring steel, L = 160 Position switch with spring steel, L = 130 6
∅ 1.25 07-2931-112216XX ∅ 5.8 07-2931-112217XX

135 Measurement for switch position angle
0 45° 72° 0 45° 72°

120 Measurement for switch position angle
(See contact travel)
13-14 NO 13-14 NO
(See contact travel)
23-24
25°
NO 23-24
25°
NO
7
2° 72
2°
212.5
72
182.5
7 ° 7 °
07-2931-112616XX 07-2931-112617XX
0° 45° 72° 0° 45° 72°
13-14 NO 13-14 NO
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
30° 30°
07-2931-116616XX 07-2931-116617XX
0° 30° 72° 0° 30° 72°

11-12 NC 11-12 NC
21-22 NC 21-22 NC
30° 30°
07-2931-122616XX 07-2931-122617XX
0° 30° 72° 0° 30° 72°
17
17
15-16 NC 15-16 NC
27-28 NO 27-28 NO
20° 20°
07-2931-132616XX 07-2931-132617XX
0° 30° 72° 0° 30° 72°
21-22 21-22
13-14 13-14
21-22 21-22
03-0330-0584-05/10-BCS-303057/4
13-14 13-14
15° 15°
07-2931-141116XX 07-2931-141117XX
0° 12° 55° 72° 0° 12° 55° 72°
Q1 Q1
Q2 Q2
Contact closed 30° *) Contact closed 30° *)
Contact openly 07-2931-142116XX Contact openly 07-2931-142117XX

Setting range 0° 12° 55° 72° Setting range 0° 12° 55° 72°
Q1 Q1
30° *) 30° *)
149
Cable entries and line bushings
Line bushings
Line bushings
Features
 Space-saving construction as many single  On the Ex d side, the cores are connected
cores are gathered in one single sleeve directly to the electrical load, intermediate
thus requiring only one cable entry hole. terminals are no longer necessary.
 As all 6 cores are brought out, direct  Small dimensions allow a rated insulation
Y-switching. Is also possible on the motor voltage of up to 3 kV
multi-core terminal board of Ex d motors.  Blue cores for Ex i low power circuits
with threaded sleeve  Motor mains and thermoprotection cables can
be exited in one common sleeve.
 Permanent heat-resistance of the cores up
to +110 °C
 Numbered cores simplify connections and
eliminate the usual “Ring out“ in larger
control systems.
Description
multi-core A line bushing is a component for the electrical terminals are rated for 690 V and 1 000 V and
PTB-certified. We supply them with 2 to 6 poles
with cylindrica sleeve connection between a flameproof “d“ enclosure
and an increased safety “e“ terminal box. The and threaded sleeves from M 24 to M 42.
bushing consists of a threaded or non-threaded All line bushings have been PTB and BVS tested
metal sleeve encapsulating one or more cores and certified for their use in hazardous areas
providing a flameproof barrier. The lengths of according to the European standards EN 50014,
these leads vary according to their applications. EN 50018, EN 50019. BARTEC also has numerous
The depth of engagement of the threaded sleeves other international approvals for these line
and the joint length of the cylindrical sleeve in bushings.
the wall of the “d“ enclosure must correspond to All line bushings have been certified by the
the EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-1 standards. Federal Physical-Technical Institute in accordance
After installation the bushing must be protected with the European standards EN 60079-0,
against rotation and accidental loosening. EN 60079-1 and EN 60079-7 concerning
Recommendations are given under “Accessories“. electrical operating equipment for explosion-
endangered areas for above-ground (II) and
4-pole or 6-pole Our standard bushings come with threaded
sleeves from M10 to M48 or with cylindrical underground (I) according to ATEX. BARTEC has
with terminals sleeves. They are equipped with cores with a furthermore obtained several foreign admissions
for these line bushings (FM, UL).
0.2 to 95 mm2 csa. and approved for nominal
voltages between 250 V and 3 000 V. See also When the 94/9/EC guideline comes into force on
table “Electrical data“. 01/07/2003, explosion protected operating
For the connection of intrinsically safe circuits in equipment must be properly Installed in
the “d“ area with the terminal strip in the accordance with EN 60079-14.
connection compartment we provide line Among other things, section 10.4.2 requires that
bushings with blue cores for “i“ low power cast, pressure-proof cable insertions
03-0330-0181/A-10/11-BCS-200637/1
circuits. according to EN 60079-1 are used for

Another product of our line-bushing range is the operating equipment with an internal ignition
source for the explosion subgroup IIC and
bushing with terminals. Combining Ex d line
bushing with an Ex e terminal we designed an operating equipment with an enclosure volume
greater than 2 dm3 in zone 1.
element which is hardly any bigger than a normal
line bushing. This bushing plus terminals reduces BARTEC offers a wide range of products with EC
the size of the terminal box and, at the same time, type test certification.
the installation costs. The bushings plus
152
Line bushings
Standard Ex protection type Certification
EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-1 II 2G Ex d II Electrical bushings Type 07-91..-/.... 1
I M2 Ex d I PTB 97 ATEX 1047 U
Ex d II, Ex d I IECEx PTB 06.0093 U
UL 886, UL 2279; Class I, Zone 1 AEx d IIC E225236
Class I, Group A, B, C, D
Class II, Group E, F, G c
FMRC - 3615, -3600, -3810 FM J.I.1Q5A5.AE
EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-1 II 2G Ex de II Fibre-optic cable bushings Type 57-91..-..../.... 2
I M2 Ex de I PTB 99 ATEX 1090 U
EN 60079-0, EN 60079-1 II 1G Ex de II Bushings for Zone 0, Type 07-96..-..../....
EN 60079-7 and EN 60079-26 I M1 Ex de I PTB 00 ATEX 1116 U
Ex de II, Ex de I IECEx PTB 06.0061U
Line bushings in the
EN 60079-0, EN 60079-1, EN 60079-7 II 2G Ex de II Line bushings with terminals
Ex e terminal box I M2 Ex de I Type 07-93..-.0../....
PTB 00 ATEX 1034 U 3
IEC 60079-0: 2004, IEC 60079-1: 2001, Ex de II, Ex de I IECEx PTB 06.0035U
IEC 60079-7: 2001
Min. ambient temperature: Depends on the conductor used, down to -55 °C
Electrical data
4
Nominal Cores Cross section Threaded sleeve Max. on-site
voltage in mm² temperature
250 V H05V-K/Radox 0.25 to 1.5 M 10 x 1 to M 42 x 1.5 +70 °C/+110 °C
H07V-K
690 V H07G-K/Radox 0.25 to 70 M 10 x 1 to M 42 x 1.5 +110 °C/+110 °C
1 000 V NSGAFöu/Radox 1.5 to 95 M 16 x 1 to M 42 x 1.5 +90 °C/+110 °C

5
3 000 V NSGAFöu 1.5 to 95 M 24 x 1,5 to M 42 x 1.5 +90 °C

Connection side of the for intrinsically safe circuits
line bushing with terminals
250 V H05V-K, blue
H07G-K, blue 0.5 to 1.5 M 10 x 1 to M 42 x 1.5 +70 °C/+110 °C 6
Line bushings with terminals
690 V H07G-K 0.75 to 6 M 24 x 1.5 to M 42 x 1.5 +110 °C
1000 V NSGAFöu/Radox 1.5 to 6 M 33 x 1.5 to M 42 x 1.5 +90 °C/+110 °C
Selection chart 7
Sleeve type Code Nominal Code Conductor,cross- Code Sleeve size Code Protection class Code
no. voltage no. section mm2 no. no. (testing agency/standard status) no.
Special diameter A M10 x 1
threaded, 0
0 690 V 1 0.25 C
metric Ex d II/I (PTB) ATEX G
0.35 D M16 x 1 1
0.5 E M24 x 1.5
threaded 1 250 V 2 2
other than metric 0.75 F ∅ ≥ 22 mm
1 G M33 x 1.5
1.5 H ∅ ≥ 32 mm 3 Ex d II for intrinsically safe circuits (PTB) ATEX H
special threaded 3 1 000 V 3
2.5 J
M36 x 1.5 4
4 K
pluggable, length of 6 L M38 x 1.5
5 3 000 V 4 5
crack 12.5 mm 10 M ∅ ≥ 36 mm
Ex d (FM) M
special voltage
16 N M42 x 1.5 6
pluggable, length of > AC 50 V/ 25 P
6 8
crack 25 mm DC 75 V M12 x 1.5 C
35 Q
50 R
03-0330-0181/A-10/11-BCS-200637/2
M16 x 1.5 D Ex d (UL) U

pluggable, length of < AC 50 V/ 70 S
7 9 M20 x 1.5 E
crack 40 mm DC 75 V 95 T
Mixed cores Z M25 x 1.5 F
Number of cores
Complete order no. 07-91 - / z. B. 02 = 2 cores; 21 = 21 cores; etc. 1 ... 40 cores
Please insert correct code. Core length: as ordered
Core identification: printed numbers
153
Line bushings 250 V1) with blue cores for intrinsically safe circuits
Selection chart - cores H05V-K or H07V-K

Number Conductor Rated current (A) for continuous Thread Dimensions Order no.
of cores cross section operation (reference values) 2) size m7 Indicate core length on both boss and
mm2 Maximum on-site temperature +70 °C mm sleeve side and colour of cores for
EEx i circuits in plain text
1 0.5 M10 x 1 25 07-9102-E010
1 0.5 M12 x 1.5 25 07-9102-E01C
6 0.5 M16 x 1 25 07-9102-E061
6 0.5 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9102-E06D
15 0.5 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9102-E152
4A
15 0.5 M25 x 1.5 26 07-9102-E15F
16 0.5 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9102-E163
20 0.5 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9102-E204
30 0.5 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9102-E305
40 0.5 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9102-E406
1 0.75 M10 x 1 25 07-9102-F010
1 0.75 M12 x 1.5 25 07-9102-F01C
3 0.75 M16 x 1 25 07-9102-F031
3 0.75 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9102-F03D
6 0.75 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9102-F062
9A
6 0.75 M25 x 1.5 26 07-9102-F06F
12 0.75 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9102-F123
15 0.75 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9102-F154
24 0.75 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9102-F245
24 0.75 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9102-F246
1 1.5 M10 x 1 25 07-9102-H010

1 1.5 M12 x 1.5 25 07-9102-H01C
3 1.5 M16 x 1 25 07-9102-H031
3 1.5 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9102-H03D
6 1.5 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9102-H062
16 A
6 1.5 M25 x 1.5 26 07-9102-H06F
12 1.5 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9102-H123
15 1.5 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9102-H154
24 1.5 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9102-H245
24 1.5 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9102-H246
Dimensions in mm Dimensions in mm
m6
m6
Boss side Boss side

m7
m5
m4
m5
m4
m7
Sleeve side Sleeve side
m1 m1
m3
m3
m2 m2
m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6
M10 x 1 13.5 12 16 1.5 5 M33 x 1.5 ∅ 38 36 18 2.0 7
03-0330-0181/A-10/10-BCS-200637/3
M12 x 1.5 16.5 15 17 2.0 5 M36 x 1.5 ∅ 42 40 25 2.0 7

M16 x 1 21 19 17 1.5 5 M38 x 1.5 ∅ 40 37 24 2.0 8
M16 x 1.5 21 19 17 2.0 5 M42 x 1.5 ∅ 48 46 25 2.0 7
M24 x 1.5 29 27 19 2.0 5
M25 x 1.5 29 27 19 2.0 5
1)
Maximum nominal voltage 275 V
2)
Maximum current carrying capacity of the cores on site depends on their own temperature and that of the enclosure at maximum ambient temperature.
Other equipment and special sleeves on request.
154
Line bushings 690 V1)
Selection chart - cores 4GAF 0.75 mm²/H07G-K from 1.5 mm²

Number Conductor Rated current (A) for continuous Thread Dimensions Order no. 1
of cores cross section operation (reference values) 2) size m7 Indicate core length on both boss
mm2 Maximum on-site temperature 70 °C mm and sleeve side in plain text.
multi-core single core
+65 °C +80 °C +100 °C +110 °C +80°C
1 0.75 M10 x 1 25 07-9101-F010
1 0.75 M12 x 1.5 25 07-9101-F01C 2
3 0.75 M16 x 1 25 07-9101-F031
3 0.75 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9101-F03D
6 0.75 13 A 10 A 8A <5A 16 A M24 x 1.5 26 07-9101-F062
6 0.75 M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-F06F
12 0.75 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9101-F123
15 0.75 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9101-F154
24 0.75 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9101-F245
25 0.75 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9101-F256 3
1 1.5 M10 x 1 25 07-9101-H010
1 1.5 M12 x 1.5 25 07-9101-H01C
3 1.5 M16 x 1 25 07-9101-H031
3 1.5 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9101-H03D
6 1.5 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9101-H062
6 1.5 20 A 15 A 13 A <8A 25 A M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-H06F
12 1.5 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9101-H123 4
15 1.5 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9101-H154
15 1.5 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9101-H155
25 1.5 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9101-H256
1 2.5 M16 x 1 25 07-9101-J011
1 2.5 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9101-J01D
3 2.5 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9101-J032
3 2.5 27 A 20 A 18 A < 10 A 34 A M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-J03F 5
8 2.5 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9101-J083
10 2.5 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9101-J104
10 2.5 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9101-J105
14 2.5 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9101-J146
1 4 M16 x 1 25 07-9101-K011
1 4 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9101-K01D
3 4 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9101-K032 6
3 4 36 A 27 A 23 A < 14 A 45 A M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-K03F
6 4 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9101-K063
8 4 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9101-K084
8 4 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9101-K085
12 4 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9101-K126
1 6 M16 x 1 25 07-9101-L011
1 6 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9101-L01D 7
2 6 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9101-L022
2 6 47 A 35 A 31 A 18 A 57 A M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-L02F
6 6 M33 x 1.5 30 07-9101-L063
6 6 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9101-L064
6 6 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9101-L065
8 6 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9101-L086
1 10 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9101-M011
1 10 M16 x 1.5 25 07-9101-M01D
1 10 M24 x 1.5 26 07-9101-M012
3 10 65 A 49 A 42 A < 25 A 78 A M33 x 1.5 30 07-9101-M033
6 10 M36 x 1.5 35 07-9101-M064
6 10 M38 x 1.5 36 07-9101-M065
8 10 M42 x 1.5 35 07-9101-M086
1 16 M24 x 1.5 40 07-9101-N012
1 16 M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-N01F
3 16 M33 x 1.5 40 07-9101-N033
87 A 65 A 57 A < 33 A 104 A
3 16 M36 x 1.5 40 07-9101-N034
3 16 M38 x 1.5 40 07-9101-N035
6 16 M42 x 1.5 40 07-9101-N066
1 25 M24 x 1.5 40 07-9101-P012
03-0330-0181/A-10/10-BCS-200637/4
- - - - 137 A
1 25 M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-P01F
1 35 - - - - 168 A M24 x 1.5 40 07-9101-Q012
1 35 M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-Q01F
1 50 - - - - 210 A M24 x 1.5 40 07-9101-R012
1 50 M25 x 1.5 46 07-9101-R01F
1 70 - - - - 260 A M33 x 1.5 50 07-9101-S013
1 70 M36 x 1.5 50 07-9101-S014
1)
2)
Other equipment, mixed cores and special sleeves on request.
155
Line bushing 1 000 V1)
Selection chart - cores NSGAFöu

Number Conductor Rated current (A) for continuous Thread Dimensions Order no.
of cores cross section operation (reference values) 2) size m 7 3) Indicate core length on both boss
mm2 Maximum on-site temperature +90 °C mm and sleeve side in plain text.
1 1.5 M16 x 1 25 07-9103-H011

1 1.5 18 A M16 x 1,5 25 07-9103-H01D
3 1.5 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9103-H032
3 1.5 M25 x 1,5 26 07-9103-H03F
8 1.5 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9103-H083
10 1.5 12 A M36 x 1,5 35 07-9103-H104
10 1.5 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9103-H105
15 1.5 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9103-H156
1 2.5 M16 x 1 25 07-9103-J011
25 A
1 2.5 M16 x 1,5 25 07-9103-J01D
5 2.5 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9103-J053
6 2.5 M36 x 1,5 35 07-9103-J064
6 2.5 18 A M38 x 1,5 36 07-9103-J065
8 2.5 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9103-J086
1 4 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9103-K012
34 A
1 4 M25 x 1,5 26 07-9103-K01F
3 4 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9103-K033
5 4 M36 x 1,5 35 07-9103-K054
27 A M38 x 1,5 36 07-9103-K055
5 4
6 4 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9103-K066
1 6 42 A M24 x 1,5 26 07-9103-L012
1 6 M25 x 1,5 26 07-9103-L01F
3 6 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9103-L033
4 6 M36 x 1,5 35 07-9103-L044
4 6 36 A M38 x 1,5 36 07-9103-L045
6 6 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9103-L066
1 10 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9103-M012
58 A
1 10 M25 x 1,5 26 07-9103-M01F
2 10 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9103-M023
3 10 47 A M36 x 1,5 35 07-9103-M034
3 10 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9103-M035
1 16 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9103-N012
1 16 78 A M25 x 1,5 26 07-9103-N01F
3 16 65 A M42 x 1,5 35 07-9103-N036
1 25 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9103-P012
103 A M25 x 1,5 26 07-9103-P01F
1 25
1 35 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9103-Q013
126 A
1 35 M38 x 1,5 30 07-9103-Q015
1 50 157 A M33 x 1,5 50 07-9103-R013
m6
m6
Boss side Boss side

m7
m4
m5
m7
m4
m5
m1 m1
m3
m3
m2 m2
03-0330-0181/A-10/10-BCS-200637/5
m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6
M16 x 1 21 19 22 1.5 5 M33 x 1.5 ∅ 38 36 25 2.0 7
M16 x 1.5 21 19 22 2.0 5 M36 x 1.5 ∅ 42 40 25 2.0 7
M24 x 1.5 29 27 22 2.0 5 M38 x 1.5 ∅ 42 40 25 2.0 8
M25 x 1.5 29 27 35 2.0 5 M42 x 1.5 ∅ 48 46 25 2.0 7
1)
Maximum nominal voltage 1 100 V
2)
3)
Thread size M25 x 1.5 - dimensions m 7 = 46 mm
Other eqipment, core combinations and special sleeves on request.
156
Line bushings 3 000 V1)
Selection chart - cores NSGAFöu

Number Conductor Rated current (A) for continuous Thread Dimensions Order no. 1
of cores cross section operation (reference values) 2) size m 7 3) Indicate core length on both boss
mm2 Maximum on-site temperature +90 °C mm and sleeve side in plain text.
1 1.5 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9104-H012

18 A
1 1.5 M25 x 1,5 26 07-9104-H01F
3 1.5 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9104-H033 2
6 1.5 12 A M36 x 1,5 35 07-9104-H064
6 1.5 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9104-H065
8 1.5 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9104-H086
1 2.5 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9104-J012
1 2.5 25 A M25 x 1,5 26 07-9104-J01F
3 2.5 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9104-J033
5 2.5 M36 x 1,5 35 07-9104-J054 3
18 A M38 x 1,5 36
5 2.5 07-9104-J055
8 2.5 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9104-J086
1 4 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9104-K012
34 A
1 4 M25 x 1,5 26 07-9104-K01F
3 4 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9104-K033
3 4 M36 x 1,5 35 07-9104-K034
3 4 27 A M38 x 1,5 36 07-9104-K035 4
6 4 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9104-K066
1 6 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9104-L012
1 6 42 A
M25 x 1,5 26 07-9104-L01F
3 6 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9104-L033
4 6 M36 x 1,5 36 07-9104-L044
36 A
4 6 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9104-L045
6 6 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9104-L066
5
1 10 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9104-M012
58 A
1 10 M25 x 1,5 26 07-9104-M01F
2 10 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9104-M023
3 10 M36 x 1,5 35 07-9104-M034
47 A
3 10 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9104-M035
3 10 M42 x 1,5 35 07-9104-M036
1 16 M24 x 1,5 26 07-9104-N012 6
1 16 78 A 07-9104-N01F
M25 x 1,5 26
2 16 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9104-N025
3 16 65 A M42 x 1,5 35 07-9104-N036
1 25 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9104-P013
1 25 103 A M36 x 1,5 35 07-9104-P014
1 25 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9104-P015
2 25 82 A M42 x 1,5 35 07-9104-P026 7
1 35 M33 x 1,5 30 07-9104-Q013
1 35 126 A M36 x 1,5 35 07-9104-Q014
1 35 M38 x 1,5 36 07-9104-Q015
1 50 157 A M33 x 1,5 50 07-9104-R013
m6
m6
Boss side Boss side

m5
m7
m7
m5
m4
m4
m1 m1
m3
m3
03-0330-0181/A-10/10-BCS-200637/6
m2 m2
1)
Maximum nominal current 3 300 V
2)
Maximum current carrying capacity of the cores on site depends on their temperature their own self heating and that of the enclosure at maximum ambient temperature.
3)
Thread size 25 x 1.5 - Dimensions m 7 = 46 mm
Other equipment, core combinations and special sleeves on request.
157
Line bushings 690 V1) with cylindrical sleeves
Selection chart - cores 4GAF 0.75 mm²/H07G-K from 1.5 mm²

Number of Conductor Rated current(A) for continuous sleeve Dimensions Order no.
cores cross section operation (reference values) 2) size m7 Joint length L = 15 mm 07-..5.-
mm2 Maximum on-site temperature mm Joint length L = 25 mm 07-..6.-
multi-core single core Indicate the core length on both
+65 °C +80 °C +100 °C +110 °C +80°C the boss sleeve sides in plain text
6 0.75 ∅ 22 23 07-9151-F062
6 0.75 ∅ 22 31 07-9161-F062
13 10 8 <5 16
12 0.75 ∅ 32 32 07-9161-F123
15 0.75 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-F155
6 1.5 ∅ 22 23 07-9151-H062
6 1.5 ∅ 22 31 07-9161-H062
12 1.5 20 15 13 <8 25 ∅ 32 32 07-9161-H123
15 1.5 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-H155
3 2.5 ∅ 22 31 07-9161-J032
6 2.5 27 20 18 < 10 34 ∅ 32 32 07-9161-J063
10 2.5 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-J105
3 4 ∅ 22 31 07-9161-K032
6 4 36 27 23 < 14 45 ∅ 32 32 07-9161-K063
8 4 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-K085
2 6 ∅ 22 31 07-9161-L022
6 6 47 35 31 < 18 57 ∅ 32 32 07-9161-L063
8 6 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-L085
1 10 ∅ 32 32 07-9161-M013
65 49 42 < 25 78
6 10 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-M065
4 16 87 65 57 < 33 104 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-N045
1 25 115 137 75 < 44 137 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-P015
1 35 143 168 93 < 54 168 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-Q015
1 50 - - - - 210 ∅ 36 39 07-9161-R015
Note: 1. Cylindrical sleeves with joint length L = 15 mm (type 07-9151) for enclosures with a volume of  2 litres.
2. Cylindrical sleeves with joint length L = 25 mm (type 07-9161) for enclosures with a volume of  2 litres.
Dimensions in mm m2
m6
Boss side
m7
m4
m3
m8
Sleeve side
m5
-0,03
m 1 - 0,1
Joint length L m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m8
15 mm ∅ 22 ∅ 25 - 16.1 1.3 2 11.1 + 0.2
25 mm ∅ 22 ∅ 25 - 26.1 1.3 2 11.1 + 0.2
25 mm ∅ 32 ∅ 36 - 26.1 1.6 3 17.1 - 0.2
03-0330-0181-08/08-BCS-200637/7
25 mm ∅ 36 ∅ 42 AF 40 28.1 1.85 7 -
Other cross sections on request.
1)
2)
Maximum current carrying capacity of the cores on site depend on their own temperature and that of the enclosure at maximum ambient temperature.
158
Line bushings with terminals
Selection chart - cores 4GAF 0.75 mm²/H07G-K from 1.5 mm²/690 V, NSGAFöu/1 000 V
Rated No. of Conductor Thread Rated current (A) for continuous Order no. 1
insulation terminals/ cross section size operation (reference values) 2)
voltage 1) cores mm² Maximum on-site temperature Add core length in cm
+65 °C +80 °C +100 °C +110 °C e.g. 10 cm = 10
0.75 M24 x 1.5 13 A 10 A 8A < 5A 07-9304-F042/

1.5 M24 x 1.5 20 A 15 A 13 A < 8A 07-9304-H042/
4 2.5 M24 x 1.5 27 A 20 A 07-9304-J042/ 2
18 A < 10 A
4 M24 x 1.5 36 A 27 A 23 A < 14 A 07-9304-K042/
0.75 M33 x 1.5 13 A 10 A 8A < 5A 07-9304-F043/
690 V 1.5 M33 x 1.5 20 A 15 A 13 A < 8A 07-9304-H043/
4 2.5 M33 x 1.5 27 A 20 A 18 A < 10 A 07-9304-J043/
H07G-K
4 M33 x 1.5 36 A 27 A 23 A < 14 A 07-9304-K043/
4GAF 0.75 mm² 6 M33 x 1.5 47 A 35 A 31 A < 18 A 07-9304-L043/ 3
0.75 M42 x 1.5 13 A 10 A 8A < 5A 07-9304-F046/
1.5 M42 x 1.5 20 A 15 A 13 A < 8A 07-9304-H046/
4 2.5 M42 x 1.5 27 A 20 A 18 A < 10 A 07-9304-J046/
4 M42 x 1.5 36 A 27 A 23 A < 14 A 07-9304-K046/
6 M42 x 1.5 47 A 35 A 31 A < 18 A 07-9304-L046/
0.75 M38 x 1.5 13 A 10 A 8A < 5A 07-9304-F065/
M38 x 1.5 20 A < 8A
4
1.5 15 A 13 A 07-9304-H065/
6 2.5 M38 x 1.5 27 A 20 A 18 A < 10 A 07-9304-J065/
4 M38 x 1.5 36 A 27 A 23 A < 14 A 07-9304-K065/
690 V 6 M38 x 1.5 47 A 35 A 31 A < 18 A 07-9304-L065/
H07G-K
0.75 M42 x 1.5 13 A 10 A 8A < 5A 07-9304-F066/
4GAF 0.75 mm² 1.5 M42 x 1.5 20 A 15 A 13 A < 8A 07-9304-H066/
6 2.5 M42 x 1.5 27 A 20 A 18 A < 10 A 07-9304-J066/ 5
4 M42 x 1,5 36 A 27 A 23 A < 14 A 07-9304-K066/
6 M42 x 1.5 47 A 35 A 31 A < 18 A 07-9304-L066/
1.5 M33 x 1.5 16 A 12 A - - 07-9306-H043/
2.5 M33 x 1.5 23 A 18 A - - 07-9306-J043/
4 M33 x 1.5 36 A - 07-9306-K043/
4 27 A -
1 000 V 6 M33 x 1.5 47 A 36 A - - 07-9306-L043/
6
(NSGAFöu) 1.5 M42 x 1.5 16 A 12 A - - 07-9306-H046/
2.5 M42 x 1.5 23 A 18 A - - 07-9306-J046/
4
4 M42 x 1.5 36 A 27 A - - 07-9306-K046/
6 M42 x 1.5 47 A 36 A - - 07-9306-L046/
1.5 M38 x 1.5 16 A 12 A - - 07-9306-H065/
6 2.5 M38 x 1.5 23 A 18 A - - 07-9306-J065/
4 M38 x 1.5 36 A 27 A - - 07-9306-K065/ 7
1 000 V
(NSGAFöu) 1.5 M42 x 1.5 16 A 12 A - - 07-9306-H066/
2.5 M42 x 1.5 23 A 18 A - - 07-9306-J066/
6
4 M42 x 1.5 36 A 27 A - - 07-9306-K066/
6 M42 x 1.5 47 A 36 A - - 07-9306-L066/
∅ 46 (690 V)
∅ 40 (690 V) ∅ 52 (1000 V)
∅ 46 (1000 V) ∅ 39
∅ 33
28
Additional marker Additional marker

28
60
60
21
29
3
29
21
3
6 1 2
03-0330-0181-08/08-BCS-200637/8
1
4
3
2 690 V und 1 000 V 5 4 3 690 V und 1 000 V
m1
m1 m 1 M24 x 1.5 M33 x 1.5 M42 x 1.5 m 1 M38 x 1.5 M42 x 1.5
m2
m2
m2 ∅ 30 ∅ 36 ∅ 44 m2 ∅ 40 ∅ 44
1)
Maximum nominal voltage 750 V or 1 100 V respectively.
2)
Maximum current carrying capacity of the cores on site depend on their own temperature and that of the enclosure at maximum ambient temperature.
Max. tightening torque of fixing screws 1 Nm.
159
Bushing conductor studs 690, 1000 and 1600 Volt
Bushing conductor studs
 16 A to 630 A A bushing conductor stud is a component with
which the electrical connection between an
 690 V, 1000 V and 1600 V
enclosure in type of protection “Flameproof
 Max. ambient temperature 130 °C enclosure d“ and its connection enclosure in type
of protection “Increased Safety e“ is established.
 Different types of terminals
The cable bushing includes a threaded metal
 Standard thread M16 x 1.5 to M42 x 1.5
sleeve, a ceramic insulation, terminals and a stud.
Standard threaded sleeves from M16 to M42 are
included in the delivery of bushing conductor
Dimensions
studs.
I
The diameter of the stud depends on current and
the terminal size on the cable diameter.
Thanks to different types of terminals, vertical as
well as horizontal cable connection is possible.
G
Special terminals are available on request.

After installation, the bushing conductor stud
needs to be secured by means of a nut or adhesive
to prevent self-loosening.
03-0330-0432/A-09/10-BCS-240910/1
160
Bushing conductor studs 690, 1000 and 1600 Volt

Ex protection type Protection class 1
II 2G Ex de IIC Gb EN 60079-0: 2009; EN 60079-1: 2007
I M2 Ex de I Mb
Material
Certification Insulation ceramic, C610
PTB 04 ATEX 1099 U
Stud
Ambient temperature at place 16 A to 250 A CuZn39Pb2
of installation 400 A to 630 A E-Cu
2
-50 °C to +130 °C
Current
16 A to 630 A
Voltage
690 V, 1000 V and 1600 V
3
Connection
1.5 mm2 to 300 mm2
Stud size
4 mm to 20 mm
Thread size 4
M16 x 1.5 to M42 x 1.5
Selection chart
5
Type Current Type of terminal Thread size
TOS4.16A..-. 16 A A M16 x 1.5
TOS5.25A..-. 25 A A, F, FL, RF, C M18 x 1.5
TOS6.63A..-. 63 A A, F, FL, RF, C M20 x 1.5 6
TOS8.100A..-. 100 A F, FL, RF, C M24 x 1.5
TOS10.160A..-. 160 A F, FL, RF, R M27 x 1.5
TOS12.250A..-. 250 A F, FL, RF, R M33 x 1.5

7
TOS16.400A..-. 400 A F, FL, RF, R M36 x 1.5
TOS20.630A..-. 630 A F, FL, RF, R M42 x 1.5
Example-
Complete order no. TOS8.100A.690V - RF
Please insert code number. Technical data subject to change without notice.
Voltage
690 V, 1000 V or 1600 V
Specify voltage.
03-0330-0432/A-09/10-BCS-240910/2
161
Bushing conductor studs types of terminals and dimensions
Type of terminal A from 690 V to 1000 V
A
F1
C
B J F
Ex d Ex e
R
M
L
P
Omax.
E K N
Hmax.
Selection chart Type of terminal A to 690 V

Type D A B C E F/F1 G Hmax. I J K L M N Omax. P R Terminals
TOS4.16.690 V M16 x 1.5 81.5 33 48.5 13.4 12/5.5 19.6 18 17 22 2 13.4 M4 M4 x 10 4 10.7 15.7 1.5 - 6 mm2
TOS5.25.690 V M18 x 1.5 87 36 51 16.5 14/5.5 21.9 18 19 22 2 15.4 M5 M5 x 10 4 11.7 17.7 2.5 - 10 mm2
TOS6.63A.690 V M20 x 1.5 93.5 39.5 54 20.3 16/7.6 25.4 18 22 22 2 19.4 M6 M6 x 10 4 15.1 22.6 2.5 - 16 mm2
Selection chart Type of terminal A to 1000 V

TOS4.16.1000 V M16 x 1.5 97.5 41 56.5 13.4 12/5.5 19.6 18 17 22 2 13.4 M4 M4 x 10 4 10.7 15.7 1.5 - 6 mm2
TOS5.25.1000 V M18 x 1.5 103 44 59 16.5 14/5.5 21.9 18 19 22 2 15.4 M5 M5 x 10 4 11.7 17.7 2.5 - 10 mm2
TOS6.63A.1000 V M20 x 1.5 109.5 47.5 62 20.3 16/7.6 25.4 18 22 22 2 19.4 M6 M6 x 10 4 15.1 22.6 2.5 - 16 mm2
Type of terminal F from 690 V to 1000 V
A
C
B J F
Ex d Ex e
P
R
M
L
D
Omax.
E K N
Hmax.
Selection chart Type of terminal F to 690 V

TOS5.25.690 V M18 x 1.5 83.5 36 47.5 16.5 10 21.9 18 19 22 2 19 M5 M4 x 12 4 11 15 2.5 - 25 mm2

03-0330-0432/A-09/10-BCS-240910/3
TOS6.63A.690 V M20 x 1.5 89.5 39.5 50 20.3 12 25.4 18 22 22 2 23 M6 M5 x 16 4 14 19.5 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.690 V M24 x 1.5 97.5 43.5 54 24.3 15 31.2 18 27 22 2 26 M8 M6 x 25 4 17 29 6 - 50 mm2
TOS10.160A.690 V M27 x 1.5 110 50 60 30 20 34.6 18 30 22 2 36 M10 M8 x 30 5 21 35.5 10 - 95 mm2
TOS12.250A.690 V M33 x 1.5 122 55.5 66.5 35.5 25 41.6 18 36 22 2 42 M12 M8 x 35 5 24.5 40.5 16 - 185 mm2
TOS16.400A.690 V M36 x 1.5 139 65 74 45 30 47.3 18 41 22 2 50 M16 M10 x 40 5 32 47 25 - 300 mm2
TOS20.630A.690 V M42 x 1.5 153 75 78 55.1 32 53.1 18 46 22 2 50 M20 M10 x 45 6 34.5 51.5 25 - 300 mm2
162
Selection chart Type of terminal F to 1000 V

1
TOS5.25.1000 V M18 x 1.5 99.5 44 55.5 16.5 10 21.9 18 19 22 2 19 M5 M4 x 12 4 11 15 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS6.63A.1000 V M20 x 1.5 105.5 47.5 58 20.3 12 25.4 18 22 22 2 23 M6 M5 x 16 4 14 19.5 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.1000 V M24 x 1.5 113.5 51.5 62 24.3 15 31.2 18 27 22 2 26 M8 M6 x 25 4 17 29 6 - 50 mm2
TOS10.160A.1000 V M27 x 1.5 126 57.5 68.5 30 20 34.6 18 30 22 2 36 M10 M8 x 30 5 21 35.5 10 - 95 mm2
2
TOS12.250A.1000 V M33 x 1.5 138 63.5 74.5 35.5 25 41.6 18 36 22 2 42 M12 M8 x 35 5 24.5 40.5 16 - 185 mm2
TOS16.400A.1000 V M36 x 1.5 155 73 82 45 30 47.3 18 41 22 2 50 M16 M10 x 40 5 32 47 25 - 300 mm2
TOS20.630A.1000 V M42 x 1.5 169 83 86 55.1 32 53.1 18 46 22 2 50 M20 M10 x 45 6 34.5 51.5 25 - 300 mm2
4
Type of terminal FL from 690 V to 1000 V
A
C
B J F 5
Ex d Ex e
P
M
Omax.
E K N
Hmax. 6
Selection chart Type of terminal FL to 690 V

7
TOS5.25.690 V M18 x 1.5 88.5 36 52.5 16.5 15.5 21.9 18 19 22 2 19 M5 M4 x 12 4 6 14.8 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS6.63A.690 V M20 x 1.5 96 39.5 56.5 20.3 18.5 25.4 18 22 22 2 23 M6 M5 x 16 4 6.5 18.8 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.690 V M24 x 1.5 106.5 43,5 63 24.3 24 31.2 18 27 22 2 26 M8 M6 x 20 4 8 24 6 - 50 mm2
TOS10.160A.690 V M27 x 1.5 121 50 71 30 31 34.6 18 30 22 2 36 M10 M8 x 30 5 11 35.5 10 - 95 mm2
TOS12.250A.690 V M33 x 1.5 130 55.5 74.5 35.5 33 41.6 18 36 22 2 42 M12 M8 x 30 5 10 35.5 16 - 185 mm2
TOS16.400A.690 V M36 x 1.5 151 65 86 45 42 47.3 18 41 22 2 49 M16 M10 x 40 5 12.5 47 25 - 300 mm2
TOS20.630A.690 V M42 x 1.5 172 75 97 55.1 51 53.1 18 46 22 2 55 M20 M10 x 45 6 10.5 52 25 - 300 mm2
Selection chart Type of terminal FL to 1000 V

TOS5.25.1000 V M18 x 1.5 104.5 44 60.5 16.5 15.5 21.9 18 19 22 2 19 M5 M4 x 12 4 6 14.8 2.5 - 25 mm2
03-0330-0432/A-09/10-BCS-240910/4
TOS6.63A.1000 V M20 x 1.5 112 47.5 64.5 20.3 18.5 25.4 18 22 22 2 23 M6 M5 x 16 4 6.5 18.8 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.1000 V M24 x 1.5 122.5 51.5 71 24.3 24 31.2 18 27 22 2 26 M8 M6 x 20 4 8 24 6 - 50 mm2
TOS10.160A.1000 V M27 x 1.5 137 57.5 79.5 30 31 34.6 18 30 22 2 36 M10 M8 x 30 5 11 35.5 10 - 95 mm2
TOS12.250A.1000 V M33 x 1.5 146 63.5 82.5 35.5 33 41.6 18 36 22 2 42 M12 M8 x 30 5 10 35.5 16 - 185 mm2
TOS16.400A.1000 V M36 x 1.5 167 73 94 45 42 47.3 18 41 22 2 49 M16 M10 x 40 5 12.5 47 25 - 300 mm2
TOS20.630A.1000 V M42 x 1.5 188 83 105 55.1 51 53.1 18 46 22 2 55 M20 M10 x 45 6 10.5 52 25 - 300 mm2
163
Type of terminal RF from 690 V to 1000 V
A
C
B J F
Ex d Ex e
P
M
R
Omax.
E K
N
Hmax.
Selection chart Type of terminal RF to 690 V

TOS5.25.690 V M18 x 1.5 85.5 36 49.5 16.5 12.5 21.9 18 19 22 2 22 M5 M4 x 12 4 5 10 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS6.63A.690 V M20 x 1.5 93 39.5 53.5 20.3 15.6 25.4 18 22 22 2 27 M6 M5 x 16 4 6 12 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.690 V M24 x 1.5 102 43.5 58.5 24.3 19.1 31.2 18 27 22 2 32 M8 M6 x 25 4 7.5 15 6 - 50 mm2
TOS10.160A.690 V M27 x 1.5 114 50 64 30 24 34.6 18 30 22 2 41 M10 M8 x 30 5 10 20 10 - 95 mm2
TOS12.250A.690 V M33 x 1.5 125 55.5 69.5 35.5 28 41.6 17 36 22 2 43 M12 M8 x 30 5 12.5 25 16 - 185 mm2
TOS16.400A.690 V M36 x 1.5 145 65 80 45 36 47.3 17 41 22 2 55 M16 M10 x 40 5 15 30 25 - 300 mm2
TOS20.630A.690 V M42 x 1.5 161 75 86 55.1 40 53.1 17 46 22 2 61 M20 M10 x 45 5 15 30 25 - 300 mm2
Selection chart Type of terminal RF to 1000 V

TOS5.25.1000 V M18 x 1.5 101.5 44 57.5 16.5 12.5 21.9 18 19 22 2 ∅ 22 M5 M4 x 12 4 5 10 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS6.63A.1000 V M20 x 1.5 109 47.5 61.5 20.3 15.6 25.4 18 22 22 2 ∅ 27 M6 M5 x 16 4 6 12 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.1000 V M24 x 1.5 118 51.5 66.5 24.3 19.1 31.2 18 27 22 2 ∅ 32 M8 M6 x 20 4 7.5 15 6 - 50 mm2
TOS10.160A.1000 V M27 x 1.5 130 57.5 72.5 30 24 34.6 18 30 22 2 ∅ 41 M10 M8 x 30 5 10 20 10 - 95 mm2
TOS12.250A.1000 V M33 x 1.5 141 63.5 77.5 35.5 28 41.6 17 36 22 2 ∅ 43 M12 M8 x 30 5 12.5 25 16 - 185 mm2
TOS16.400A.1000 V M36 x 1.5 161 73 88 45 36 47.3 17 41 22 2 ∅ 55 M16 M10 x 40 5 15 30 25 - 300 mm2
TOS20.630A.1000 V M42 x 1.5 177.5 83 94.5 55.1 40 53.1 17 46 22 2 ∅ 61 M20 M10 x 45 5 15 30 25 - 300 mm2
Type of terminal C from 690 V to 1000 V
A
C
B J F
Ex d Ex e
P
R
M
Omax.
E K N
Hmax.
03-0330-0432/A-09/10-BCS-240910/5
Selection chart Type of terminal C to 690 V

TOS5.25.690 V M18 x 1.5 90 36 54 16.5 16.8 21.9 18 19 22 2 17,5 M5 M5 x 20/M4 x 6 4 7 20 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS6.63A.690 V M20 x 1.5 98 39.5 58.5 20.1 20.1 25.4 18 22 22 2 21 M6 M5 x 20/M4 x 5 4 7 20 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.690 V M24 x 1.5 110 43,5 66.5 24.3 26.8 31.2 18 27 22 - 28 M8 M6 x 22/M5 x 10 4 12 26 4 - 35 mm2
164
Selection chart Type of terminal C to 1000 V

1
TOS5.25.1000 V M18 x 1.5 106 44 62 16.5 16.8 21.9 18 19 22 2 17.5 M5 M5 x 20/M4 x 6 4 7 20 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS6.63A.1000 V M20 x 1.5 114 47.5 66.5 20.1 20.1 25.4 18 22 22 2 21 M6 M5 x 20/M4 x 5 4 7 20 2.5 - 25 mm2
TOS8.100A.1000 V M24 x 1.5 126 51.5 74.5 24.3 26.8 31.2 18 27 22 2 28 M8 M6 x 22/M5 x 10 4 12 26 4 - 35 mm2
Type of terminal R from 690 V to 1000 V
A 3
C
B J F
P
Ex d Ex e
R
M
Omax.
K
E 4
N
Hmax.
Selection chart Type of terminal R to 690 V

5
TOS10.160A.690 V M27 x 1.5 130.5 50 80.5 30 41.5 34.6 18 30 22 2 37 M10 M8 x 30/M6 x 22 5 19.5 39 6-70 or 10-95 mm2
TOS12.250A.690 V M33 x 1.5 145.5 55.5 92 35.5 48.8 41.6 17 36 22 2 46.6 M12 M10 x 35/M6 x 22 5 23.5 47 10-95 or 16-150 mm2
TOS16.400A.690 V M36 x 1.5 161.5 65 96,5 45 52.3 47.3 17 41 22 2 51 M16 M10 x 40/M8 x 30 5 26 52 16-150 or 16-300 mm2
TOS20.630A.690 V M42 x 1.5 175 75 100 55.1 53.3 53.1 17 46 22 2 59 M30 M10 x 45/M8 x 30 5 29.5 59 16 - 300 mm2
6
Selection chart Type of terminal R to 1000 V

TOS10.160A.1000 V M27 x 1,5 146,5 57,5 89 30 41,5 4,6 18 30 22 2 37 M10 M8 x 30/M6 x 22 5 19,5 39 6-70 or 10-95 mm2
7
TOS12.250A.1000 V M33 x 1,5 161,5 63,5 98 35,5 48,8 1,6 17 36 22 2 6,6 M12 M10 x 35/M6 x 22 5 23,5 47 10-95 or 16-150 mm2
TOS16.400A.1000 V M36 x 1,5 177,5 73 104,5 45 52,3 7,3 17 41 22 2 51 M16 M10 x 40/M8 x 30 5 26 52 16-150 or 16-300 mm2
TOS20.630A.1000 V M42 x 1,5 191 83 108 55,1 53,3 3,1 17 46 22 2 59 M30 M10 x 45/M8 x 30 5 29,5 59 16-300 mm2
03-0330-0432/A-09/10-BCS-240910/6
165
Optical fibre bushings
Ex protection type
II 2G Ex d II
I M2 Ex d I
Certification
PTB 99 ATEX 1090 U
Technical data
Power limit
max. 5 mW/mm2
No. of optical waveguides
max. 16 fibres
Temperature against the optical fibre
Optical fibre bushings max. +60 °C to +90 °C
-5 °C to +80 °C
Depending on the selected optical
waveguide, the enclosure heating at the
installation site at a max. ambient tem-
perature has to be assumed when deter-
Features mining the maximum temperature.
 Fast, interference free transmission of Type and size of thread

data in both directions M16 x 1.5 to M48 x 1.5
 Not affected by electromagnetic interference Installation instructions
 High transmission reliability Threaded entries for threaded bushings
must conform to the minimum require-
 High transmission speed
ments of EN 60079-0 section 5.3.
 Corrosion-free contacts These optical fibre line bushings are sui-
 Simple plug-in connection table for installation in electrical flame-
(low installation costs) proof enclosures devices of protection
 Reliable signal transmission even over long type “d“, groups IIA, IIB, IIC.
distances
 Suitable for use under extreme conditions Note
The bushings must be secured against
turning or loosening.
Description
The optical fibre bushing is used as an optical
fibre cable entry into flameproof enclosures lo-
cated in hazardous areas. They can also be sup-
plied with plug-in connectors.
The optical waveguiders - also known as fibres -
are made of glass and resist to mechanical, cli-
matic, chemical and electromagnetic influences.
The optical waveguide is most commonly used
for carrying signals in the form of electromagne-
tic waves in the frequency range of visible light.
The type and structure of the cable determines
its transmission properties.
03-0330-0182/A-07/10-BCS-200638/1
166
Optical fibre bushings
Dimensions
Type m1 m2 m3 m4 m5 m6 m7 1
57-910.-...7 M48 x 1.5 ∅ 55 52 30 2.0 7 50

57-910.-...6 M42 x 1.5 ∅ 48 46 25 2.0 7 35
Threaded
57-910.-...5 M38 x 1.5 ∅ 42 40 25 2.0 7 35

57-910.-...4 M36 x 1.5 ∅ 42 40 25 2.0 7 35
57-910.-...3 M33 x 1.5 ∅ 38 36 18 2.0 7 30
57-910.-...2 M24 x 1.5 ∅ 29 27 19 2.0 5 26 2
57-910.-...D M16 x 1.5 ∅ 21 19 17 1.5 5 25
Dimensions threaded Complement

≤3m
optical waveguide cable*

Cable version 3
50/125; 62,5/125; 200/230
m6
boss side
Type max. number of cores
m5
m3
m7
m4
57-910.-...7 16
57-910.-...6 12
Threaded
sleeve side 57-910.-...5 8
4
≤3m
m2 57-910.-...4 8
57-910.-...3 6
m1 57-910.-...2 4
57-910.-...D 1
*Single mode-lines on request
5
Selection chart optical fibre line bushing
Code Code nominal diameter (μm) Code Code

Sleeve type Fibre type core/jacket sleeve size
no. no. core/jacket or core/fibre* no. no.
M16 x 1.5 D 6
50/125 2
M24 x 1.5 2
M33 x 1.5 3
7
screw-in, metric 0 single strand/single strand A 62.5/125 3 M36 x 1.5 4
material: glass/glass
M38 x 1.5 5
M42 x 1.5 6
200/230 6
M48 x 1.5 7
*Single mode-lines on request
Complete 57-91 -
order no. No. of cores
Please insert correct code. Technical data subject to change without notice.
03-0330-0182-08/08-BCS-200638/2
167
Electrode line bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed
Description
Waste water pumps can be fully submergible
units. The pump assembly and motor are often
separated from each other by an oil fore-chamber
sealed by mechanical seals. Any leaks in the shaft
seals need to be registered in order to prevent
Electrode line bushing malfunctions or failure of the motor and to arrange
for inspections in good time.
BARTEC’s electrode line bushings Ex + sealed
allow signals to be reliably transmitted through
the walls of pressure-proof enclosed operating
equipment, even in areas in which an explosion
hazard exists.
Only electrical circuits certified as intrinsically
safe may be connected to the electrode line
bushing.
Example application Dimensions

Connector Ex protection type
wires
AF I M2/II 2G Ex d I/II
A*
FM
Certification
2
PTB 02 ATEX 1061 U

O-ring
FMRC J.I. 1Q5A5AE
25
17
20
Ambient temperature at point of

installation
B*
to +70 °C resp. +110 °C

C
adhered in
Technical data
Sensor pin Protection class
Ex d I; Ex d II
∅3
G Material
Sleeve Brass nickel-plated or
Example application stainless steel
Gauge Brass or stainless steel
Thread M10 x 1; M12 x 1; M16 x 1.5
others on request
Pressure on the Ex e side
< 6 bar
D
See table for standard lengths, < 30 V
other lengths on request
Rated constant current
<1A
counter nut
Connection method
Safety notice
Cable wires 0.5 to 1.5 mm2
Electrode line bushings that are damaged must
be replaced. The electrode line bushing must be
secured against twisting and self-loosening.
Selection chart
03-0330-0293/A-07/10-BCS-216962
G C D AF A B O-ring
M10 x 1 2 14.5 13 500 36 9 x 1.5 37-9405-1230/1000

M12 x 1 2 16.5 15 500 36 10 x 1.5 37-9405-123B/1000
M16 x 1.5 2 21.0 19 500 36 14 x 2 37-9405-123D/1000
168
Bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed

These bushings II 1G in the series 07-96..-.... Ex protection type
serve not only as the electrical connecting element II 1G Ex de II 1
between a pressure-proof encapsulated enclosure I M1 Ex de I
and a housing in another recognised method of Certification
protection, but also as a gas diffusion-proof PTB 00 ATEX 1116 U
separating element to zone 0 (IG/IIG). IECEx PTB 06.0061 U
Bushing The core piece of this gas diffusion-proof lead- Temperature during nominal operation
through is a metal plate in which the stud-type Ta -55 °C to +150 °C 2
bushings are insulated with glass. The electrical (depending on the type of cable)
connection on both sides of the lead-through can
be set forth with metal duct bolts, cable wires or Technical data
hose lines as required.
Protection class
This connecting area is, or can additionally be, IEC 60529/EN 60529 3
cast with a poured resin. without encapsulating IP 00
The connector studs, connecting wires or the hose Material
line of the line bushing II 1G must be connected Sleeve metal
in enclosures which conform to a type of Insulator glass
protection standardised according to DIN EN Pour EP resin, PU resin
Features 60079-0. Bushing bolt FeNi alloy steel, 4
Niro steel
 Sleeve size M10 to ∅ 250 The lead-through is compliant with the pertinent Rated insulation voltage
 Cross-sections for 0.06 mm or 185 mm
2 2 DIN EN 60079-0, DIN EN 60079-1 and DIN EN < AC 50 V/DC 75 V, 250 V, 690 V, 1 000 V
60079-7 and DIN EN 60079-26 standards.
 Ex d and pressure-sealed Rated uninterrupted current up to 200 A
 -55 °C to +150 °C Connection line 0.25 bis 6.0 mm2
Diameter flange ∅ 10 mm to 250 mm 5
 Number of connection options
Thread size M10 x 1 to M72 x 1.5
Selection chart
Form side Zone 0 Code Nominal Code Stud ∅ Code Number Code Form side Zone 1, Code Protection system Code
no. voltage no. no. of studs/ no. Zone 2 or Ex-free no. (test body, standard no. 6
wires revision)
Flange with extra Special diameter A Flange with extra
0 00 0
screw part-metric (0.3 to 16 mm) screw part-metric
690 V 1
Flange with extra 0.5 B
1 Flange with extra
screw part-NPT 1 01 1
screw part-NPT
0.6 C 7
Flange with extra 0.8 D Flange with extra
screw part-Whitworth 2 250 V 2 ... ... screw part-Whitworth 2
Pipe thread 1.0 E Pipe thread
Flange 3 1.6 F Flange 3

10 10
1 000 V 3 2.0 G Ex de I and Ex de II
Flange with extra
4 Flange with extra
screw part-Pg 4
3.0 H 11 11 screw part-Pg PTB G
Flange with extra 4.0 J
5 Flange with extra ATEX approval
plug part L > 12.5 < 25 special ... ... 5
plug part L > 12.5 < 25
voltage 5.0 K
Flange with extra > AC 50 V/ 8
6 Flange with extra
plug part L > 25 < 40 DC 75 V 6.0 L 6
20 20 plug part L > 25 < 40
< 10 00 V
Flange with extra 8.0 M
7
plug part L > 40 Flange with extra
10.0 N 21 21 7
plug part L > 40
Flange with extra 12.0 P
8
plug part-special forms ... ... Flange with extra
< AC 50 V/ 8
03-0330-0293-08/08-BCS-216963
14.0 Q plug part-special forms

DC 75 V 9
Flange with extra
plug part-fixing 9 16.0 R Flange with extra
flange 99 99 plug part-fixing 9
mixed Z flange
Complete order no. 07-96 - / XXX

169
Cable entries
Cable entries
 Ex e terminal boxes are dispensed with Flameproof Ex d cable entries are elements which All line bushings have been certified by the
allow electrical cables to be introduced into an Federal Physical-Technical Institute in
 Suitable for cables with 1 to max. 25 cores
Ex d enclosure, without danger of explosion. accordance with the European standards DIN
 Sleeves from M16 x 1.5 to M48 x 1.5 The additional Ex e terminal housing is not EN 60079-0 and DIN EN 60079-1 concerning
required. A main distribution box may by used electrical operating equipment for hazardous
 Compact, space-saving design areas for above-ground (II) and underground (I)
or the connections can be made outside the Ex-
 The cores are connected directly to the zone. according to ATEX.
electrical load at the Ex d side, The cable entry consists of a threaded metal When the 94/9/EC guideline comes into force on
intermediate terminal positions are sleeve, in which a sheathed cable is anchored 01/07/2003, explosion protected operating
dispensed with and encapsulated. The individual cores are then equipment must be properly Installed in
connected directly inside the flameproof accordance with DIN EN 60079-14.
 Rated insulation voltage of up to 1000 V enclosure. The length of cores and cables are Among other things, section 10.4.2 requires that
for small dimensions customer-tailored. All cables come with standard cast, pressure-proof cable insertions according
 For Ex i circuits with blue cables green-yellow earth leads. The length of engaged to DIN EN 60079-1: 2007 are used for operating
thread between the sleeve and the flameproof “d“ equipment with an internal ignition source for the
 Permanent heat resistance up to +110 °C enclosure must comply with DIN EN 60079-0: explosion sub-group IIC and operating equipment
2006 and DIN EN 60079-1. with an enclosure volume greater than 2 dm3 in
The cable entry is normally inserted from the Zone 1.
inside of the flameproof enclosure. A special BARTEC offers a wide range of products with EC
version can be supplied for insertion from the model test certification.
outside, provided that removal is possible with a
special tool only. After installation, the cable entry
must be protected against turning and loosening,
corresponding recommendations can be found
under accessories.
03-0330-0183/A-07/10-BCS-200639/1
170
Cable entries
Version Standard Ex protection type Certification
1
Cable entry screwable EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-1 II 2G Ex d IIC T6/T4 PTB 97 ATEX 1079 X
Cable entry pluggable EN 60079-0 and EN 60079-1 II 2G Ex d IIC T6/T4 PTB 03 ATEX 1197 U
Electrical data
Nominal Cable Cross section Threaded sleeve Max. on-site
voltage in mm² temperature 2
H05RR-F
300 V/500 V 0.75 to 2.5 M16 x 1.5 to M 48 x 1.5 +60 °C
H05RN-F
H05GG-F, Radox 125
300 V/500 V 0.75 to 6 M16 x 1.5 to M 48 x 1.5 +110 °C
Radox 155
Ölflex,
300 V/500 V 0.75 to 2.5 M16 x 1.5 to M 48 x 1.5 +70 °C
H05VV-F 3
LiYY, LiYCY, Ölflex - EB
250 V 0.5 to 2.5 M16 x 1.5 to M 48 x 1.5 +70 °C
(for intrinsically safe circuits)
H07RN-F
450 V/750 V 1.0 to 150 M24 x 1.5 to M 48 x 1.5 +60 °C
A07RN-F
H07RN-F
450 V/750 V 1.5 to 90 M24 x 1.5 to M 48 x 1.5 +90 °C
(Ozoflex-Plus) 4
1000 V NSSHöu 1.5 to 120 M24 x 1.5 to M 48 x 1.5 +80 °C
Min. ambient temperature -55 °C. Max. ambient temperature depends on the conductor.
Selection chart 5
Sleeve type Code Nominal Code Conductors cross Code Sleeve size Code Protection type (test agency/ Code
no. power no. section mm2 no. no. status of standard) no.
special cross section A
on order 0
0.25 C M16 x 1.5 D
screw-in, 0 0.35 D 6
metric NSSHöu 1 0.5 E
Ex d II
0.75 F M24 x 1.5 2 PTB 97 ATEX 1079 X (screwable) G
HO5GG-F ∅ = 22 mm PTB 03 ATEX 1197 X (pluggable)
3 1 G
Radox
1.5 H
2.5 J 7
H05RR-F 4 M36 x 1.5 4
4 K
screw-in
1 6 L
NPT ÖLFLEX 5
10 M
M48 x 1.5 7
16 N
H07RN-F bzw.
6 25 P
A07RN-F
35 Q Ex d II for intrinsically safe circuits
50 R ∅ = 36 mm 5 PTB 97 ATEX 1079 X (screwable) H
LiYY/Ölflex-EB 7
PTB 03 ATEX 1179 X (pluggable)
70 S
pluggable
6
95 T
ÖLFLEX CY 8 120 U special sizes 9
150 V
Complete order no. 07-92 - / Number of cores

03-0330-0183/A-07/10-BCS-200639/2
Please insert correct code. e.g. 02 = 2 cores; 21 = 21 cores; etc.

1 ... 25 cores
Core length: on request
Cable length: on request
Core marking:
in accordance with current standards
Other cables:
e.g. shielded or blue cable for intrinsically safe
circuits on request.
171
Cable entries 300/500 V
Selection chart cable H05RN-F or H05RR-F
Number of Conductor Current carrying capacity (A) in continuous Thread size Order no.
cores cross section operation (rel. values) 1) Please indicate core and
mm2 Maximum on-site temperature +60 °C cable length in plain text
3 0.75 M16 x 1.5 07-9204-F03D

9.5 A
5 0.75 M24 x 1.5 07-9204-F052
3 1.5 15 A M24 x 1.5 07-9204-H032

5 1.5 M24 x 1.5 07-9204-H052
3 2.5 20 A M24 x 1.5 07-9204-J032

5 2.5 M36 x 1.5 07-9204-J054
Dimensions for 300/500, 450/750 V, 1000 V in mm m6
Boss side
m5
m3
m4
m7
m2
Sleeve side
m1
m1 m5 m6 m4 m7 m2 m3
M16 x 1.5 max. 2.5 5 30 46 ∅ 21 AF 19 (lock nut)
M24 x 1.5 max. 2.5 5 30 46 ∅ 29 AF 27 (lock nut)
M36 x 1.5 max. 2.5 7 35 55 ∅ 42 AF 40
M48 x 1.5 max. 2.5 10 35 75 ∅ 55 AF 52
1)
When determining the maximum current carrying capacity of the cores, their self-heating and enclosure heating on site at maximum ambient temperature must be taken
into consideration. Other fittings and special sleeves on request.
03-0330-0183-08/08-BCS-200639/3
172
Cable entries 300/500 V, 450/750 V, 1 000 V
Selection charts
1
Ex d cable entries 300/500 V - cable H05VV-F or A05VV-F, Ölflex
Number of Conductor Current carrying capacity (A) in continuous Thread size Order no.
cores cross section operation (rel.values) 1) kept in stock please indicate core and
mm² Maximum on-site temperature +70 °C in bold types cable length in plain text
3 0.75 M16 x 1.5 07-9205-F03D 2

6 0.75 M24 x 1.5 07-9205-F062
0.75 9.5 A M36 x 1.5 07-9205-F154
15
25 0.75 M48 x1.5 07-9205-F257
2 1.5 M16 x 1.5 07-9205-H02D
6 1.5 M24 x 1.5 07-9205-H062
14 1.5 15 A M36 x 1.5 07-9205-H144
1.5 M48 x 1.5
3
25 07-9205-H257
3 2.5 M24 x 1.5 07-9205-J032
7 2.5 20 A M36 x 1.5 07-9205-J074
18 2.5 M48 x 1.5 07-9205-J187
Ex d cable entries 450/750 V - cable H07RN-F or A07RN-F

4
Maximum on-site temperature +60 °C
5 1.5 M24 x 1.5 07-9206-H052

15 A
7 1.5 M36 x 1.5 07-9206-H074
3 2.5 M24 x 1.5 07-9206-J032
7 2.5 20 A M36 x 1.5 07-9206-J074
5
19 2.5 M48 x 1.5 07-9206-J197
5 4 27 A M36 x 1.5 07-9206-K054
5 6 35 A M36 x 1.5 07-9206-L054
5 10 49 A M48 x 1.5 07-9206-M057
5 16 65 A M48 x 1.5 07-9206-N057
1 25 103 A M36 x 1.5 07-9206-P014 6
1 35 126 A M36 x 1.5 07-9206-Q014
1 50 157 A M36 x 1.5 07-9206-R014
1 70 195 A M36 x 1.5 07-9206-S014
1 95 232 A M48 x 1.5 07-9206-T017
1 120 274 A M48 x 1.5 07-9206-U017 7
1 150 311 A M48 x 1.5 07-9206-V017
Ex d cable entries 1000 V - cable NSSHÖU
Maximum on-site temperature +80 °C
5 1.5 20 A M24 x 1.5 07-9201-H052

10 1.5 M36 x 1.5 07-9201-H104
3 2.5 M24 x 1.5 07-9201-J032
7 2.5 27 A M36 x 1.5 07-9201-J074
19 2.5 M48 x 1.5 07-9201-J197
5 4 36 A M36 x 1.5 07-9201-K054
4 6 M36 x 1.5 07-9201-L044
47 A
5 6 M48 x 1.5 07-9201-L057
5 10 65 A M48 x 1.5 07-9201-M057
5 16 87 A M48 x 1.5 07-9201-N057
1 25 137 A M36 x 1.5 07-9201-P014
03-0330-0183-08/08-BCS-200639/4
1 35 168 A M36 x 1.5 07-9201-Q014

1 50 210 A M36 x 1.5 07-9201-R014
1 70 260 A M36 x 1.5 07-9201-S014
1 95 310 A M48 x 1.5 07-9201-T017
1 120 365 A M48 x 1.5 07-9201-U017
1)
When determining the maximum current carrying capacity of the cores, their self-heating and enclosure heating on site at maximum ambient temperature must be taken
into consideration. Other fittings and special sleeves on request.
173
Accessories for line bushings and cable entries
Line bushings and cable entries must be safe against turning and accidental loosening. The most
common fixing methods are shown below.
Tab washer
f
g
d1
d2
Lock nut
Across flat AF
installation size
Adhesive
Circlip
03-0330-0183-08/08-BCS-200639/5
174
Accessories for line bushings and cable entries
Selection chart accessories

1
Tab washers
Size d1 d2 f g Thickness Order no.
M10 x 1 10.5 26 4.5 10 0.75 03-3400-0001

2
M16 x 1.5 (x 1) 17 36 3.5 15 0.75 03-3400-0003
M24 x 1.5 25 45 3.5 18 0.75 03-3400-0005
M33 x 1.5 34 50 4.5 21 0.75 03-3400-0007

M36 x 1.5 37 58 4.5 26 0.75 03-3400-0008
3
M42 x 1.5 43 58 4.5 26 0.75 03-3400-0009
M48 x 1.5 50 70 4.5 30 0.75 03-3400-0010
Lock nuts
4
Size Across flat (AF) Thickness Order no.
M16 x 1 19 5 03-2000-0001
M16 x 1.5 20 3 03-2090-0120
M20 x 1.5 24 3.4 03-2090-0121 5
M24 x 1.5 27 5 03-2000-0003
M25 x 1.5 30 3.5 03-2090-0122
M32 x 1.5 35 4.5 03-2090-0123
M33 x 1.5 36 5 03-2000-0005
6
M36 x 1.5 41 6 03-2000-0006
M40 x 1.5 44 4.5 03-2090-0124
M42 x 1.5 46 6 03-2000-0008
M48 x 1.5 55 6 03-2000-0011
7
Adhesive Order no.
Contents of bottle 3 ml 02-5535-0001
Circlip similar to DIN 471 for plug-in type line bushings Order no.
∅ 22 mm 03-3480-0002
∅ 32 mm 03-3480-0003
∅ 36 mm 03-3480-0004
03-0330-0183-08/08-BCS-200639/6
175
M Bushings and cable entries pressure and vacuum sealed
Description
Cable entries are a means of running electrical
cables into enclosures and preserving a secure
Bushings and cable entries, seal at the point of entry.
The standard version IP 68 is suitable for use in
pressure and vacuum sealed environments from 10 -6 mbar to 63 bar over-
pressure. Depending on the pressure and the
medium to be sealed you can choose between two
temperature ranges:
-25 °C to +100 °C
Features -70 °C to +150 °C
 Economical, due to high packing density Depending on the pressure at the cable entry and
the medium it must to be sealed, there are
 Space-saving, due to internal thread versions for up to 1000 bar. BARTEC IP 68 cable
entries not only provide sealed cable sheath but
 Fast installation with the small flange
also protected wire strands.
versions
BARTEC cable entries basically consist of a sleeve
 Corrosion-resistant due to high-quality
fitted around resin encapsulated cables and
sleeve material
conductors. Even the standard version satisfies
 Bushing stems with suitable thermo most of the requirements for a seal made by mo-
material to ensure unimpaired signals dern process technologies. Higher demands are
from thermal sensors better met by versions with for < 10-6 mbar and
> 63 bar.
 Wide temperature range from
-25 °C to +100 °C or The BARTEC bushings have been tested with oil
-70 °C to +150 °C at 2000 bar.
03-0330-0184-08/08-BCS-200660/1
176
M Bushings and cable entries pressure and vacuum sealed
Single-core non-sheated cable Single-core non-sheated cable
Technical data 1
Temperature range
-70 °C to +150 °C
Pressure
up to 200 bar P1 P2
Vacuum T1 T2 2
10-6 mbar
Protection class P1 T1 P2 T2
IP 65 to IP 68
4
Cable Entries Cable Entries
Technical data
Temperature range
-70 °C to +150 °C
5
Pressure
up to 200 bar
Vacuum
10-6 mbar
Protection class T
6
IP 65 to IP 68
P
Materials
nickel-plated brass
stainless steel
1.4305 or 1.4571
7
Applications  Versions and dimensions  Insulation materials

Sealed electric distribution boxes; hydraulic The standard threaded sleeve can be screwed into BARTEC insulates with highly filled expoxy res-
plants; nuclear power plants; climatic chambers; thread sizes from M24 x 1.5 to M50 x 1.5. Other ins. Different formulations are used for the various
nuclear engineering; pneumatic plants; split cage dimensions and special threads such as NPT and pressure and temperature ranges.
motors; submersible pumps; drying kilns; Witworth pipe threads can be supplied on request.
impregnation plants; vacuum presses; vacuum The BARTEC epoxy casting material is charact-
Versions with a plug-in flange can also be
furnaces. erized by its low outgassing. These material have
supplied.
been used most successfully for many years in
 Electrical versions The accommodation of several cables, which may industrial vacuum engineering. Their maximum
have different core cross sections, in a common baking temperature of +150 °C - depending on
The standard versions have cables with flexible sleeve allows compact, dimensioning and the material used - make them an ideal solution
cores of a 0.5 mm2 to 35 mm2 cross section. Lar- economic constructions. Cables with up to 45 for almost all industrial applications.
ger and smaller cross sections are available on cores with cross sections of 0.5 mm2 can be put
request. The standard sealing washer is made of VITON.
in an M50 x 1.5 sleeve.
03-0330-0184-08/08-BCS-200660/2
For special application, VITON-FEP-sheathed

Depending on version, fittings, temperature range For versions with long cables, the screw-in O-rings can be used. Also available are silicone
and core insulation, a voltage range of up to solution is not the most advantageous. Here the sealing washers.
10 000 V is possible. plug-in versions with mounting flange consider-
The versions for higher sealing requirements
IP 68 versions used in temperature measurement ably facilitate installation. The flange may be made
provide factory-made grooves in the sleeves for
circuits, the bushing stems are made of material to customer specifications.
the sealing washers.
with appropriate thermal characteristics.
177
M Nonthreaded line bushings pressure and vacuum sealed
Line bushings with threaded sleeve

Description
Industrial processes often take place within closed containers, under increased pressure or even vacuum
conditions. It is therefore of utmost importance that no media leakages or pressure/vacuum drops
occur when cables are led in or out. Our BARTEC pressure and vacuum sealed line bushings provide
a simple and cost-effective solution to this problem. The line bushings essentially consist of a metal
sleeve encapsulating the whole length of the electric conductors within epoxy-resin. This means that
sealing is not only guaranteed for the whole length of the conductors but also through the stranded
conductors themselves. Depending on their field of application, BARTEC pressure and vacuum sealed
line bushings can be used at temperatures of -70 °C to +150 °C rising to short-term +180 °C. With
regard to the actual temperature and surrounding media, pressures of 10-6 mbar to more than 200 bar
can be withstood. Our BARTEC line bushings can also be used under conditions that differ from the
basic technical data listed below.
They have not been approved for use in potentially explosive areas.
Explosion-proof and pressure-sealed versions (PTB 97 ATEX 1047 U).
Selection chart
Thread size Dimensions in mm Nominal max.
conductor number of
b c I1 I2 I3 I4 AF cross-section conductors
0.5 9
0.75 / 1 / 1.5 3
2.5 1
M24 x 1.5 ∅ 36 ∅ 28 50 34 17.5 0 32 4 1
6 1
10 1
85 49 17.5 20 32 16 1
0.5 18
0.75 / 1 / 1.5 8
2.5 4
M33 x 1.5 ∅ 43 ∅ 35 50 34 17.5 0 41 4 1
6 1
25 1
85 49 17.5 20 41 35 1
0.5 22
0.75 / 1 / 1.5 10
M36 x 1.5 ∅ 46 ∅ 38 50 34 17.5 0 41 2.5 6
4 3
6 3
85 49 17.5 20 41 10 + (1.5) 3 + (3)
0.5 30
0.75 / 1 / 1.5 16
2.5 8
M42 x 1.5 ∅ 55 ∅ 45 50 34 17.5 0 50 4 5
6 5
10 + (1.5) 3 + (6)
85 49 17.5 20 50 16 + (1.5) 3 + (3)
10 + (1.5) 4 + (4)
0.5 45
03-0330-0186-08/08-BCS-200662/1
0.75 / 1 / 1.5 30
2.5 13
M50 x 1.5 ∅ 63 ∅ 54 77 26 14 35 60 4 9
6 9
10 + (1.5) 3 + (6)
16 + (1.5) 3 + (6)
25 + (1.5) 3 + (6)
97 36 14 45 60 35 + (1.5) 3 + (3)
10 + (1.5) 4 + (4)
16 + (1.5) 4 + (4)
25 + (1.5) 4 + (4)
178
M Nonthreaded line bushings pressure and vacuum sealed
Dimensions
b
Technical data
 Basic version
1
Protection class
Bond side IP 68
Nominal voltage
SW
450/750 V
I4
Rated conductor cross section 2
I1
0.35 mm2 to 35 mm2
2,5
Temperature range
I3
I2
X -25 °C to +100 °C
Sleeve side Nominal pressure
X 2:1
63 bar at RT (RT= +25 °C) 3
1,5
Test pressure
80 bar at RT (RT= +25 °C)
a Core lengths
c 2,6
500 mm on both sides,
4
Selection chart
Nominal Code Conductor Code Number Code Sleeve sizes Code Temperature Code Sleeve Code
5
voltage no. cross section no. of cores no. no. no. material no.
Special
450/750 V 1 A 1 core 01
cross section
M24 x 1.5 2 nickel-plated
0.35 mm2 D brass 00
250 V 2 2 cores 02 6
2
0.5 mm E
M33 x 1.5 3 -25 °C 0
to +100 °C
0.75 mm2 F 10 cores 10
1 000 V 3
nickel-plated
1.00 mm2 G steel 01 7
11 cores 11 M36 x 1.5 4
3 000 V* 4 1.5 mm2 H
2.5 mm2 J
20 cores 20
60 V 5
4.0 mm2 K M42 x 1.5 6
Steel 1.4305 02
6.0 mm2 L 21 cores 21
400 V 7
10.0 mm² M -70 °C

etc. up to a M50 x 1.5 8 5
to +150 °C
max. indicated
500 V 8 16.0 mm² N in column
“Maximum
number of cores“ Steel 1.4571 03
25.0 mm² P
in the chart
Special Special size 9
9 “Dimensions“
voltage 35.0 mm² Q
03-0330-0186-08/08-BCS-200662/2
* on request
Complete order no. 37-910 - /7

179
M Cable entries pressure and vacuum sealed
Cable entries
with threaded sleeves
Description
Industrial processes often take place within closed containers, under increased pressure or even vacuum
conditions. It is therefore of utmost importance that no media leakages or pressure/vacuum drops
occur when cables are led in. Our BARTEC pressure and vacuum sealed cable entries provide a simple
and cost-effective solution to this problem. The cable entries essentially consist of a metal sleeve
encapsulating the whole length of the electric conductors within epoxy-resin. This means that sealing
is not only guaranteed for the whole length of the conductors but also through the stranded conductors
themselves.
Depending on their field of application, BARTEC pressure and vacuum sealed cable entries can be
used at temperatures of -70 °C to +150 °C rising to short-term +180 °C. With regard to the actual
temperature and surrounding media, pressures of 10-6 mbar to more than 200 bar can be withstood.
Our BARTEC cable entries can also be used under conditions that differ from the basic technical data
listed below.
They have not been approved for use in potentially explosive areas.
Explosion-proof and pressure-sealed versions (PTB 97 ATEX 1047 U).
Selection chart
Tread size Dimensions in mm Nominal Number of
conductor cores (max.)
b c I1 I2 I3 I4 AF cross section
0.5 9
0.75/1/1.5 3
M24 x 1.5 ∅ 36 ∅ 28 73 34 17.5 23 32 2.5 1
4 1
6 1
0.5 18
0.75/1/1.5 8
M33 x 1.5 ∅ 43 ∅ 35 83 34 17.5 33 41 2.5 4
4 1
6 1
0.5 22
0.75/1/1.5 10
M36 x 1.5 ∅ 46 ∅ 38 83 34 17.5 33 41 2.5 6

4 3
6 3
0.5 30
0.75/1/1.5 16
03-0330-0187-08/08-BCS-200663/1
M42 x 1.5 ∅ 55 ∅ 45 83 34 17.5 33 50 2.5 8

4 5
6 5
180
M Cable entries pressure and vacuum sealed
Dimensions
b
Technical data
 Basic version 1
Protection class
IP 68
Bond side Nominal voltage
450/750 V
Nominal conductor cross section
I4
0.35 mm2 to 6 mm2 2
I1
2.5
Temperature range
-25 °C to +100 °C
I3
I2
X
Nominal pressure
Sleeve side
X 2:1
Test pressure 3
1.5
a Cable lengths
500 mm
c 2.6
Core lengths
Cable enters on boss side 2.5 m (other lengths on request)
4
Selection chart
Nominal Code Conductor Code No. of cores Code Sleeve size Code Temperature Code Sleeve Code
voltage no. cross section no. conductors no. no. no. material no. 5
special
450/750 V 1 M24 x 1.5 2
cross section A 1 core 01
nickel-plated
brass 00
250 V 2 0.35 mm2 D 2 cores 02 6

M33 x 1.5 3 -25 °C
0
to +100 °C
0.5 mm2 E etc.
1 000 V 3
nickel-plated
steel 01
0.75 mm2 F 10 cores 10 M36 x 1.5 4 7
3 000 V* 4
1.00 mm2 G 11 cores 11

60 V 5 M42 x 1.5 6
1.5 mm2 H 20 cores 20 steel 1.4305 02
400 V 7
2.5 mm2 J 21 cores 21 M50 x 1.5 8 -70 °C

5
to +150 °C
500 V 8 etc. up to max.
4.0 mm2 K indicated in
column steel 1.4571 03
„Maximum special size 9
special 9 number of cores“
voltage 6.0 mm2 L in the chart
„Dimensions“
03-0330-0187-08/08-BCS-200663/2
* on request
Complete order no. 37-920 - /7

167
181
M Cable entries - submersible
Cable entries with threaded sleeve
Description
Technical data
BARTEC submersible cable entries maintain their seal even under extreme conditions. Major fields of
application are submersible pumps for use areas such as:  Basic version
 water treatment plants  sewage treatment plants  sewage disposal  building sites Protection class
The cable sheath and cores are encapsulated in a special sealing compound. If the cable is damaged, IP 68
no water can penetrate the cable entries causing a short-circuit. Pressure seal
Our BARTEC submersible cable entries are sealed over their whole length. BARTEC submersible up to 6 bar
cable entries are designed for depths with pressures up to 6 bar. The standard version is threaded,
but flanged versions can also be supplied. Temperature resistance
For these cable entries, BARTEC use as extremely robust NSSHÖU cable resistant to extreme stress max. +100 °C at encapsulation
such as sewage or chemically agressive waste water. The basic versions have 4 x 1.5 mm 2 or 7 x Voltage
2.5 mm2 cores. For special cables incorporating pilotlines, we offer versions with 7 x 1.5 mm2 or up to 500 V for NSSHöU
10 x 1.5 mm2 when used with oil-filled motors, the cables can be provided with FEP-insulated stranded
conductors. The standard version has nickel-plated brass threaded sleeves. For special applications, Cable length outside
BARTEC offers threaded sleeves of stainless steel types. 6 m1)
Explosion-proof version (PTB 97 ATEX 1079 X). Core length inside

0.15 m1)
Dimensions
Selection chart
2)
Thread a Dimensions Connection2) Cable Voltage Order no.
in mm number of
cores x
6m
I1 I2 AF cross section
7x4 on request
AF
4x4 NSSHöU 500 V 37-9208-K044/2000
M36 x 1.5 85 45 41
7 x 2.5 NSSHöU 500 V 37-9208-J074/2000
2
I1
4 x 2.5 NSSHöU 500 V 37-9208-J044/2000

18
a
03-0330-0187-08/08-BCS-200663/3
3 x 2.5 NSSHöU 500 V 37-9208-J032/2000

I2
M24 x 1.5 75 35 30
4 x 1.5 NSSHöU 500 V 37-9208-H042/2000
1)
0.15 m
2)
other cross sections and cables on request
182
M Bushing conductor studs pressure and vacuum tight
Stud-type bushing with threaded sleeve 2

Industrial processes often take place within closed containers, under increased pressure or even
vacuum conditions. It is therefore of utmost importance that no media leakages or pressure/vacuum  Basic Version
drops occur when electrical power or signals are led through the container wall. Our BARTEC pressure 4
Nominal voltage
and vacuum sealed stud-type bushings provide a simple and cost-effective solution to this problem. 400 V 2)
The stud-type bushings essentially consist of a threaded metal sleeve and the stud forming one
block by means of a creepage-proof insulation material. Stud thread
The electrical connection can be made by the user himself with conventional connection systems. M8 to M16
The seals can withstand pressures from 10 mbar abs. to 63 bar depending on the type used for the
Temperature range
installation. 5
-25 °C to +100 °C
Depending on their field of application, BARTEC pressure and vacuum sealed stud-type bushings
can be used at temperatures of -40 °C to +150 °C rising to short-term +180 °C. Our BARTEC stud- Nominal pressure
type bushings can also be used under conditions that differ from the basic technical data listed 10 mbar abs. to 63 bar at RT 1) 3)
below.
Test pressure
They are not approved for the use in hazardous areas. 80 bar at RT
6
Versions deviating from the basic technical
data on request
Dimensions Selection chart 7

4)
Nominal current
∅c
at +25 °C
ambient temperature 100 A 250 A 315 A
g
f
AF Dimensions in mm
a M8 M12 M16
10
b R 1’’ R 1 1/4’’ R 1 1/2’’

c 41 55 60
(d)
k
d 100 150 160

20
e 35 50 55
f 30 50 55
e
g
g 22 40 40
AF 30 36 36
a
03-0330-0187-08/08-BCS-200663/4
b k 35 50 50
Order no. 37-9119-A019/70E2 37-9119-A019/70E1 37-9119-A019/70E4
1)
RT = +25 °C
2)
lower, depending on vacuum
3)
depending on outer seal
4)
stud: brass
183
M Electrode line bushings
Electrode line bushings with

threaded sleeve
Description
In submersible sewage pumps, motor and pump assembly are often separated by an oil chamber
sealed with mechanical seals.
To prevent motor malfunctions or breakdowns it is absolutely necessary to detect possible leakages of
the shaft seals and to carry out maintenance works in due time. Our BARTEC electrodes help you solve
this problem most cost effectively.
The electrode essientially consists of a threaded metal sleeve and a metal sensor rod forming one
block by means of a creepage-proof insulation material. An appropriate evaluation unit indicates any
existing leak or due maintenance in good time.
Depending on type and application, BARTEC electrodes can be used for temperatures from -25 °C to
+150 °C, rising to short-term +180 °C. They can also be used under conditions that deviate from the
following basic technical data.
Technical data Dimensions

Connection
 Basic version AF lead
A*
Nominal voltage
2
DC 30 V
Temperature range O-ring
25
17
-25 °C to +80 °C
20
Protection class
B*
IP 68 to 6 bar
Materials Sensor pin
Threaded sleeve: nickel-plated brass
Sensor rod: brass ∅3
Connection core: 0.75 mm² G
FEP-insulated
Encapsulation: Epoxy resin
O-ring: VITON See selection chart
for standard lengths.
Versions deviating from the basic technical data Different lengths on
on request. request. D
Selection chart
03-0330-0188-08/08-BCS-200664
G C D AF A B O-ring
M10 x 1 2 14.5 13 500 36 9 x 1.5 37-9A05-1250/1000

M12 x 1 2 16.5 15 500 36 10 x 1.5 37-9A05-125B/1000
M16 x 1.5 2 21.0 19 500 36 14 x 2 37-9A05-125D/1000
184
M Special versions
Special versions
Illustration Description 1
2
Stud plate
Stud insulated in glass
e. g. as pressure-proof motor connection
Line bushings with flat-pin plug
Prestressed-glass line bushings

electrical
7
03-0330-0184-08/08-BCS-200660/3
185
Customer requirements Cable entries/line bushings
Customer BARTEC
Street Offer Order
Phone Fax Delivery
Cable description
Boss side Shielded cable Core Current A
Description Pressure
Length mm Boss side

Nominal pressure bar
Sleeve side Shielded cable Core Sleeve side
Test pressure bar
Description
Leckage rate mb * l * s-1
Length mm
Medium
Number of cores piece
Boss side
Core cross section mm 2
Nennspannung V
Sleeve side
aggressive components of the medium

Ambient temperature °C
Diverse Ex area (Zone)
Version
Threaded sleeve Non-threaded sleeve Non-threaded sleeve with Small flange Line bushing with terminals
mounting flange
Boss side
Sleeve side
03-0330-0601-10/09-BCS-306808
Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity Quantity
Thread name Sleeve size Sleeve size Diameter ∅ Thread name
Thread size Length of gap Length of gap Length of gap Thread size
186
Signalling devices/Work light
Ex de Flashing lamp 5 Ws/15 Ws
Flashing lamp 15 Ws 5 Ws

 Set in Zone 1 and 2, Zone 21 and 22
Ex protection type
 Flash energy 5 Ws and 15 Ws II 2G Ex de IIC T6/T5
 Long life of the light tube II 2D Ex tD A21 IP66 T80 °C/T95 °C
 Maintenance-free Certification
 Compact design PTB 00 ATEX 1013
 Very sturdy
 Low power demand due to
high lamp efficiency Technical data
 Easy installation Protection class
 Protection class IP 66/67 IP 66/67 according to IEC 60529
Enclosure material
Description Aluminium, powder coated
with hardened glass dome
Plant and machinery are fitted with visual alarms
5 Ws without protective cage
to give timely warning of dangerous situations
15 Ws with protective cage
and to enable machinery to be shut down before
damage occurs.
BARTEC flashing lights for hazardous areas have  Electrical data
a flash energy of 5 Ws and 15 Ws. The flash Rated voltage
intensity, whether viewed directly or indirectly, AC 230 V 10 %
gives an ideal means of attracting attention. AC 115 V 10 % (only 15 Ws)
BARTEC’s flashing lamps provide information, DC 24 V
warnings and alarms on machinery and plant in DC 12 V (only 5 WS)
explosion-endangered areas in Zone 1 and Flash energy
Zone 2, Zone 21 and 22. 5 Ws and 15 Ws
Function Flash frequency
The flashing lamp is made of an aluminium 0.5 Hz up to 1.0 Hz
03-0330-0193/B-09/10-BCS-200870/1
Exd enclosure with a dome made of Borosilikal

ON time
glass. The electrical connection to be done to
continous rating (100 % ED)
Ex e terminals via a M20 x 1.5 plastic cable gland
or metal cable gland.External earth available. Activation
by connecting with the rated voltage
Ambient temperature range
-40 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +40 °C (T6) (T80 °C)
-40 °C ≤ Ta ≤ +55 °C (T5) (T95 °C)
188
Ex de Flashing lamp 5 Ws/15 Ws
Dimensions Ex de Flashing lamp 15 Ws Dimensions Ex de Flashing lamp 5 Ws

∅ 110 ∅ 110
1
243
231
3
∅8,4
∅8,4
10 17
17
4
∅ 85 ∅ 85
10
Selection chart
5
Code Code Code
Description Nominal voltage Signal colour
no. no. no.
AC 230 V 1 clear 1
Flashing lamp 1
15 Ws AC 115 V 2 yellow 3 6
DC 80 V 5 red 4
Flashing lamp DC 24 V 8 green 5

3
5 Ws
DC 12 V only 5 Ws 9 blue 6
7
Complete order no. 07-4838-3

03-0330-0193/B-09/10-BCS-200870/2
189
Ex signal horn
Ex signal horn

 Set in Zone 1 and 2, Zone 21 and 22
Ex protection type
 Protection class IP 65
II 2G Ex me II T5
 Sound level 105 dB II 2D IP 65 T 70 °C
 Temperature range -40 °C to +50 °C
Certification
 Easy to install BVS 05 ATEX E113 X

Machines and equipment are provided with Dimensions
acoustic warning and emergency devices for the 207 mm x 178 mm x 104 mm
protection of people and the environment. These
devices signal hazardous situations and thus Mounting dimensions
allow for instant safety measures to be taken. 160 mm x 130 mm
BARTEC provides a loud signal horn with Enclosure
continous tone in attractive design. PC
The device is suitable for applications in Connection
potentially explosive gas and dust atmospheres terminal screw max. 2.5 mm2
without further accessories.
Cable entry
The signal horn reliably warns against hazards in
cable gland M16 x 1.5
a wide temperature range of -40 °C up to
cable diameter 5 to 9 mm
+50 °C outdoors and indoors.
Mounting
wall mounting and floor mounting
 Electrical data
Rated voltage
see selection chart
Sound level
max. 105 db (A)
Type of tone
continuous tone
03-0330-0420/A-07/10-BCS-240543/1
190
Ex signal horn
Dimensions in mm
104 ∅ 6.5 1
25
207
2
207
160
130 3
178
104
34.5
4
M16 x 1.5
5
Selection chart
Type Rated voltage Code no.
DC 24 V 1
AC 24 V 2 6
Ex signal horn
AC 42 V 3
AC 115 V/120 V 4
AC 230 V 5 7
Complete order no. 07-4602-1 12

03-0330-0420-08/08-BCS-240543/2
191
Work light
Description
This LED work light is exceptionally efficient and
sturdy and still very manageable, having a net
weight of just 600 g. 30 high-power LEDs
generate a light output of over 600 lux and help
increase safety at the workplace. You can choose
the form of the fixing hook yourself, closed or
open.
This mobile LED work light with rechargeable
battery technology serves to illuminate
workplaces in hazardous environments.
The work lights can be used in hazardous areas
Work light in Zone 0, 1 and 2 in compliance with the gas-
sub-groups IIA, IIB and IIC and the temperature
class T4 as well as in Zone 20, 21 and 22 in
conformance to the certified maximum surface
temperature.
Features Work light Charging station including power pack

 Rechargeable batteries
Explosion protection Explosion protection
 High IP rating (IP 66)
 High luminosity Ex protection type and Certification Restriction
II 1G Ex ia op is IIC T4 may not be used in a hazardous
 Long service life II 1D Ex iaD 20 T 100 °C environment
IBExU 09 ATEX 1087
Dimensions in mm Ex ia IIC T4
Ex iaD 20 T 100 °C Technical data
IECEx IBE 09.0012 Supply voltage
0044 AC 200 V to 250 V
DC 12 V to 24 V
Approved for all Zones
0/20 Type of connection
134,5
AC/DC adapter
plug-in charger
Technical data Power consumption
104,0 140,0
AC 16 W, DC 12 W
Ambient temperature for operation
-20 °C to +60 °C Ambient temperature for operation
0 °C to +40 °C
Ambient temperature
for storage and transport Ambient temperature
-25 °C to +70 °C for storage and transport
-25 °C to +75 °C
Illuminance
> 600 lux with 30 high-power LEDs Charging duration
max. 3 hours to 100% loading,
Light duration
80% after one hour
> 6 hours in continuous operation
Weight
Protection class
(charging station incl. power supply unit)
289,0
IP 66 in conformance to IEC 60529

425 g
Weight
615 g
03-0330-0567-05/10-BCS-300725
Order data
Work light with open swivel fixing hook
46,5 76,0 07-5051-3111-1000
Work light with closed swivel fixing hook

07-5051-3111-2000
192
Subject Index
Subject Type number Page
Accessories for line bushings and cable entrie 03-....-0 174 - 175
Actuating elements for zone 1 and 21 05-0003-00.... 8 - 13
Aluminium distribution boxes for Zone 1 and 21 07-51..-..../.... 114 - 117
Aluminium enclosures 07-423.-1. 48 - 49
Aluminium enclosures 07-5190-..../.... 107
Aluminium enclosures/distribution boxes 07-51..-..../.... 108 - 113
Bushing conductor studs, 690, 1000 and 1600 V TOS8.100A....V-RF 160 - 165
Bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 07-96..-..../.xxx 169
Bushings and cable entries pressure and vacuum sealed, non explosion-proof 37-910.-..../7..., 37-920.-..../7... 176 - 181
Cable entries 07-92..-..../. 170 - 173

Cable entries with threaded sleeve 37-9208-..../2000 182
Cable gland 03-606.-0... 130
ComEx Actuating elements, Accessories 07-.. 28 - 29
ComEx Control stations for zone 21 and 22 07-351.-.... 32 - 35
ComEx Control stations, stainless steel 07-3.32. 38 - 39
ComEx Control stations, Standard 07-351.- 30 - 31
Control stations in flameproof enclosures 07-41.01-.61 50 - 51
Control switch complete device, 4-pole 07-3512-10G........ 36 - 37
Control switch installation module, 4-pole 07-333-1... 18 - 19
Control unit APEX 2003.00 07-3711-1216/...7 68
Control unit APEX 2003.002x 07-3711-1216/...7 69
Control unit APEX 2003.MV 07-3711-2213/.000 70
Control unit APEX 2003.SI 07-3711-3223/.001 71
Digital purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 05-0056-00.. 76 - 77

Digital purging gas valve for Ex pz operating equipment 03-05110-00.. 79
Electrode line bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 37-9405-123./1000 168

Electrode line bushings 37-9A05-125./1000 184
Flameproof control panels Ex d IIB EJB... 54 - 55

Flameproof control panels Ex d IIC 07-43.0-0.../.... 52 - 53
Flashing lamp 5 Ws/15 Ws 07-4838-3... 188 - 189
High quality stainless steel enclosures/distribution boxes/cabinets 07-56..-.... 118 - 120

for Zone 1 and 21
Illuminated button for local control stations 07-3361-1..0 22

Illuminated button with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 07-3363-3..3 26
Illuminated button with terminals for rail-mounted installation 07-3361-1..0 16
Insert switch/limit switch 07-.511-..../.. 134 - 137
193
Subject Index
Subject Type number Page
Lamp module for local control stations 07-3353-11.0 21

Lamp module with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 07-3353-31.3 25
Lamp module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 07-3351-11.0 15
Limit Monitor 07-31B.-..../900. 46 - 47
Limit switch metal encapsulated 07-295.-..30/.. 142 - 143
Limit switch plastic encapsulated 07-2961-1.62/.. 140 - 141
Line bushings 07-91..-..../. 152 - 159
Local control stations for zone 1 and 21 07-31..- 42 - 43
Local control stations for zone 2 and 22 A7-31..- 44 - 45
Miniature insert switch/limit switch 07-.501-..../.. 138 - 139

Mini-terminal 07-9702-0.20/. 126 - 127
Optical fibre bushings 57-91..-.... 166 - 167
Plug-and-socket for Zone 1 + 2, 21 + 22 07-810.-.... 86 - 87

Polyester cabinets/-distribution boxes with door 07-51..-.00./0... 104 - 123
Polyester distribution boxes for Zone 1 and 21 07-51..-..../...., 07-5103-960. 95 - 103
Polyester enclosures/distribution boxes 07-51..-..../.... 89 - 94
Position switch Aluminium 07-2911-1.../.. 144 - 145
Position switch Thermoplastic 07-2931-1.../.. 146 - 149
Potentiometer for local control stations 07-3373-1D.0 23
Potentiometer max. 4 W with individual leads 07-661.-.11. 58 - 59
Potentiometer max. 8 W with cable tail 07-662.-.1.. 60 - 61
Potentiometer with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 07-3373-3D.3 27
Potentiometer with terminals for rail-mounted installation 07-3371-1D.0 17
Pressure monitor module 17-51P3-..0. 80
Pressure reducer 05-0056-00.. 81
Proportional purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 05-0056-00.. 78
Protective conductor terminals and PE terminals 05-0012-00.. 125
Screw plugs 03-5210-00.. 131

Signal horn 07-4602-1.12 190 - 191
SILAS Controller A7-3741-1110/.000 72 - 73
Small control, regulating and display devices 07-61.1-... 56 - 57
Stud-type bushing with threaded sleeve 37-9119-A019/70E. 183
Switch module for local control stations 07-3323-1.00 20
Switch module with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 07-3323-3.03 24
Switch module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 07-3321-1.00 14
Terminal block 07-9721-0..0 128 - 129

Terminal box 07-5311-.... 106
Work light 07-5051-3111-.000 192
194
Type Index
Type number Subject Page
03-....-0... Accessories for line bushings and cable entries 174 - 175
03-05110-00.. Digital purging gas valve for Ex pz operating equipment 79
03-5210-00.. Screw plugs 131
03-606.-0... Cable gland 130
05-0003-00.... Actuating elements for zone 1 and 21 8 - 13

05-0012-00.. Protective conductor terminals and PE terminals 125
05-0056-00.. Digital purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 76 - 77
05-0056-00.. Pressure reducer 81
05-0056-00.. Proportional purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 78
07-.. ComEx Actuating elements, Accessories 28 - 29

07-.501-..../.. Miniature insert switch/limit switch 138 - 139
07-.511-..../.. Insert switch/limit switch 134 - 137
07-2911-1.../.. Position switch Aluminium 144 - 145
07-2931-1.../.. Position switch Thermoplastic 146 - 149
07-295.-..30/.. Limit switch metal encapsulated 142 - 143
07-2961-1.62/.. Limit switch plastic encapsulated 140 - 141
07-3.32. ComEx Control stations, stainless steel 38 - 39
07-31..- Local control stations for zone 1 and 21 42 - 43
07-31B.-..../900. Limit Monitor 46 - 47
07-3321-1.00 Switch module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 14
07-3323-1.00 Switch module for local control stations 20
07-3323-3.03 Switch module with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 24
07-333-1... Control switch installation module, 4-pole 18 - 19
07-3351-11.0 Lamp module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 15
07-3353-11.0 Lamp module for local control stations 21
07-3353-31.3 Lamp module with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 25
07-3361-1..0 Illuminated button for local control stations 22
07-3361-1..0 Illuminated button with terminals for rail-mounted installation 16
07-3363-3..3 Illuminated button with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 26
07-3371-1D.0 Potentiometer with terminals for rail-mounted installation 17
07-3373-1D.0 Potentiometer for local control stations 23
07-3373-3D.3 Potentiometer with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 27
07-351.- ComEx Control stations, Standard 30 - 31
07-351.-.... ComEx Control stations for zone 21 and 22 32 - 35
07-3512-10G........ Control switch complete device, 4-pole 36 - 37
07-3711-1216/...7 Control unit APEX 2003.00 68
07-3711-1216/...7 Control unit APEX 2003.002x 69
07-3711-2213/.000 Control unit APEX 2003.MV 70
07-3711-3223/.001 Control unit APEX 2003.SI 71
07-41.01-.61 Control stations in flameproof enclosures 50 - 51
195
Type Index
Type number Subject Page
07-423.-1. Aluminium enclosures 48 - 49

07-43.0-0.../.... Flameproof control panels Ex d IIC 52 - 53
07-4602-1.12 Signal horn 190 - 191
07-4838-3... Flashing lamp 5 Ws/15 Ws 188 - 189
07-5051-3111-.000 Work light 192
07-51..-..../.... Aluminium distribution boxes for Zone 1 and 21 114 - 117
07-51..-..../.... Aluminium enclosures/distribution boxes 108 - 113
07-51..-..../.... Polyester enclosures/distribution boxes 89 - 94
07-51..-..../...., 07-5103-960. Polyester distribution boxes for Zone 1 and 21 95 - 103
07-51..-.00./0... Polyester cabinets/-distribution boxes with door 104 - 123
07-5190-..../.... Aluminium enclosures 107
07-5311-.... Terminal box 106
07-56..-.... High quality stainless steel enclosures/distribution boxes/cabinets 118 - 120
for Zone 1 and 21
07-61.1-... Small control, regulating and display devices 56 - 57
07-661.-.11. Potentiometer max. 4 W with individual leads 58 - 59
07-662.-.1.. Potentiometer max. 8 W with cable tail 60 - 61
07-810.-.... Plug-and-socket for Zone 1 + 2, 21 + 22 86 - 87
07-91..-..../. Line bushings 152 - 159
07-92..-..../. Cable entries 170 - 173
07-96..-..../.xxx Bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 169
07-9702-0.20/. Mini-terminal 126 - 127
07-9721-0..0 Terminal block 128 - 129
17-51P3-..0. Pressure monitor module 80
37-910.-..../7..., 37-920.-..../7... Bushings and cable entries pressure and vacuum sealed, non explosion-proof 176 - 181
37-9119-A019/70E. Stud-type bushing with threaded sleeve 183
37-9208-..../2000 Cable entries with threaded sleeve 182
37-9405-123./1000 Electrode line bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 168
37-9A05-125./1000 Electrode line bushings 184
57-91..-.... Optical fibre bushings 166 - 167
A0-31..- Local control stations for zone 1 and 21 42 - 43

A7-31..- Local control stations for zone 2 and 22 44 - 45
A7-3741-1110/.000 SILAS Controller 72 - 73
EJB... Flameproof control panels Ex d IIB 54 - 55
TOS8.100A....V-RF Bushing conductor studs, 690, 1000 and 1600 V 160 - 165
196
Safe.t® Solutions Safe.t® Components Safe.t® System
Safe.t® Systems Safe.t® Technology Safe.t® Seminars Safe
Safe.t® Solutions Safe.t ® Components Safe.t® Syste
Safe.t® Systems Safe.t® Technology Safe.t® Seminars Saf

Safe.t® Seminars Safe.t® Solutions Safe.t® Components Saf
UK-D-BCS080805-07/11-BARTECWerbeAgentur-240346
BARTEC GmbH Max-Eyth-Straße 16 Phone: +49 7931 597-0 info@bartec.de

Germany 97980 Bad Mergentheim Fax: +49 7931 597-119 www.bartec-group.com

CCS 0711 e

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CCS 0711 e

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ms Safe.t® Technology Safe.t® Seminars Safe.t® Solutions Safe.

fe.t® Solutions Safe.t ® Components Safe.t® Systems Safe.t®Technology

Control and connection equipment

Pressurised control panels

Cable entries and line bushings

Signalling devices/Work light

ComEx Control stations 7 - 39

Switch module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 14

Lamp module with terminals for rail-mounted installation 15

Illuminated button with terminals for rail-mounted installation 16

Potentiometer with terminals for rail-mounted installation 17

Control switch installation module, 4-pole 18 - 19

Switch module for local control stations 20

Lamp module for local control stations 21

Illuminated button for local control stations 22

Potentiometer for local control stations 23

Potentiometer with connection cable for installation on panel (front installation) 27

ComEx Actuating elements, Accessories 28 - 29

ComEx Control stations, Standard 30 - 31

ComEx Control stations for zone 21 and 22 32 - 35

Control switch complete device, 4-pole 36 - 37

ComEx Control stations, stainless steel 38 - 39

Local control stations for zone 2 and 22 44 - 45

Control stations in flameproof enclosures 50 - 51

Flameproof control panels Ex d IIC 52 - 53

Flameproof control panels Ex d IIB 54 - 55

Small control, regulating and display devices 56 - 57

Potentiometer max. 4 W with individual leads 58 - 59

Potentiometer max. 8 W with cable tail 60 - 61

Customer requirements Control stations 62 - 65

Pressurised control panels 67 - 83

Control unit APEX 2003.002x 69

Control unit APEX 2003.MV 70

Control unit APEX 2003.SI 71

Digital purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 76 - 77

Proportional purging gas valve for Ex px operating equipment 78

Digital purging gas valve for Ex pz operating equipment 79

Pressure monitor module 80

Customer requirements Ex p equipment 82 - 83

Switches 133 - 149

Bushing conductor studs, 690, 1000 and 1600 V 160 - 165

Optical fibre bushings 166 - 167

Electrode line bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 168

Bushing explosion-proof and pressure-sealed 169

Cable entries 170 - 173

Accessories for line bussings and cable entries 174 - 175

Bushings and cable entries 176 - 181

Cable entries with threaded sleeve 182

Stud-type bushing with threaded sleeve 183

Electrode line bushings 184

Special versions 185

Customer requirements Cable entries/line bushings 186

Signalling devices/Work light 187 - 192

Signal horn 190 - 191

Work light 192

Features Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D

Protection class of the actuating elements

Position selector switch 05-0003-007... IP 54 IP 66, IP 67

Illustration Dimensions Description Order no.

for ComEx enclosure Position selector switch black

for ComEx enclosure 05-0003-007102

* 3 boreholes in the protective collar to fit padlocks

in the switch position 0 (I), or to customer